This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op-tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
Cherokee Chrysler Group LLC OWNER'S MANUAL 2015 Cherokee 15KL74-126-AD Fourth Edition Printed in U.S.A. 2015
2015
OWNER'S MANUAL
Cherokee
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don't drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733 10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
INTRODUCTION 5
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by 1
injury. Drive carefully.
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:
6 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op- window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the 1
erating procedures that could result in a collision or title.
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce- The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you of the engine block.
do not read this entire Owner's Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. The VIN number also is stamped into the right front body, on the right front seat cross member. With the seat in the rear most position a flap in the carpet can be cut open and lifted to reveal the VIN. It also appears on
Vehicle Identification Number
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Right Front Body VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Ignition Node Module (IGNM) -- If Equipped. .12 To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Key Fob -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .22 Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .23 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .23 Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .24 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM -- IF EQUIPPED . . .19 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .25
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .26 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED . .29 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
To Enter Remote Start Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Child-Protection Door Lock System -- Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GOTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Power Liftgate -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Remote Start Comfort Systems -- If Equipped . .33 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .51
Remote Start Windshield Wiper DeIcer Activation -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .64 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .112 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
2
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system consists of a either a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) -- If Equipped
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)
1 -- OFF 2 -- ACC (ACCESSORY) 3 -- ON/RUN 4 -- START
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
2
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System) has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start, ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the Key Fob against the Engine START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System)
1 -- OFF 2 -- ACC (ACCESSORY) 3 -- ON/RUN
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob -- If Equipped
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM System)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver's door when the ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime will 2 sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster.
Emergency Key Removal (KIN System)
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
· Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
· Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system. 2 operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are pro- Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate possible by an authorized dealer.
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
with an invalid Key Fob.
CAUTION!
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the system. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
· Do not make modifications or alterations to the immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to the immobilization system may result in a loss of security protection.
· The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
· Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
· For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
General Information
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 door locks and liftgate release are disabled.
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security 2
subject to the following conditions:
Alarm will provide the following audible and visible
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
signals:
· This device must accept any interference that may be · The horn will pulse.
received, including interference that may cause unde- · The park lamps and/or turn signals will flash.
sired operation.
· The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved will flash.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Rearming Of The System
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM -- IF EQUIPPED
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-GoTM cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the Security Alarm will rearm itself.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the "OFF" position (refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information). · For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
· For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGoTM, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF, and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle: · Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
· Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information).
· Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:
· Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
· Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (if equipped). Refer to Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
· Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF · When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
position.
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
· For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM , The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your 2 push the Keyless Enter-N-GoTM Start/Stop button vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle). system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
· For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N- ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
GoTM, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
turn the key to the ON position.
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
NOTE:
· The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
· The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound. If this
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors -- if equipped. Refer to "Mirrors" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE:
· The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the "Dome defeat" position (extreme bottom position).
· The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the "Dome defeat" position (extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
Emergency Key Removal (KIN)
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM) To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Sound Horn With Lock
NOTE:
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors · The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic 2
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your horn will remain on.
Instrument Panel" for further information.
· You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
Using The Panic Alarm
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, Programming Additional Transmitters
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
· Perchlorate Material -- special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
· Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
Emergency Key Removal (KIN)
2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal (if equipped) and gently prying the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart with the emergency key. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Remove Screw From Transmitter Case
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Separating Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Transmitter Case
Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar, and then replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils by the party responsible for compliance could void the
may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, user's authority to operate the equipment.
2
clean it with rubbing alcohol.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two distance, check for these two conditions:
halves together.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
General Information
the battery is a minimum of three years.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
following conditions:
radios.
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· Battery at an acceptable charge level
· The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
· Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:
· RKE PANIC button not pushed · System not disabled from previous remote start event · Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing · Ignition in OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-GoTM
vehicle · Fuel level meets minimum requirement
· Shift Lever in PARK
WARNING!
· Doors closed · Hood closed · Liftgate closed · Hazard switch off
· Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
· Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING! (Continued)
· Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
· Remote Start Disabled -- Start Vehicle To Reset
· Remote Start Aborted -- Too Cold
· Remote Start Aborted -- Time Expired
2
The message will stay active until the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) -- If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC/DID if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
· Remote Start Aborted -- Door Ajar
· Remote Start Aborted -- Hood Ajar
· Remote Start Aborted -- Fuel Low
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
· Remote Start Aborted -- Liftgate Ajar
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
· The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.
· For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
· The engine can be started two consecutive times with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP button. If the START/ STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE:
Remote Start Comfort Systems -- If Equipped
· For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N- When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel
GoTM feature, the ignition switch must be in the and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on 2
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
· For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-NGoTM feature, the message "Remote Start Active -- Insert Key and Turn To Run" will display in the EVIC/DID until you insert the key. Refer to "Elec-
feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated. These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be acti-
Information Display" in "Understanding Your Instru- vated and deactivated through the Uconnect® SET-
ment Panel" for further information.
TINGS. For more information on Remote Start Comfort
· For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-GoTM
System operation, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel."
feature, the message "Remote Start Active -- Push
Start Button" will display in the EVIC/DID until you
push the START button.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Windshield Wiper DeIcer Activation -- If Equipped
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient temperature is less than 33° F (.5° C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting Remote Start will resume previous operation, except if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and operation will continue.
If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible) when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red indicator is visible.
· For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
· Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the 2 doors and liftgate.
Power Door Lock Switch
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter-N-GoTM (Passive Entry) system. For further information, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle."
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Placing the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks -- If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or through the Uconnect® Settings in your radio.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission shift lever was not in PARK, then is placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Set- screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial to the
tings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for LOCK or UNLOCK position. When the system on a door 2
further information.
is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature unlocked position.
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System -- Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· When the child lock system is engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
· After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.
· After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.
· For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the window, and open the door with the outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GOTM
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle's Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-GoTM. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
· Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
"Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instru-
2
ment Panel" for further information.
· If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
· If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door Handle, and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and, if equipped, will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Push" is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver's door handle. To select between "Unlock Driver Door 1st Push" and "Unlock All Doors 1st Push," refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry. There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle:
· A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter while a door is ajar.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver's door unlock preference setting ("Unlock Driver Door 1st Push" or "Unlock All Doors 1st Push").
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
· A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle while a door is ajar.
· A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the door is ajar.
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car, and it does not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Push" is programmed in
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the EVIC/DID (if equipped), all doors will unlock when you
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
push the electronic release on the liftgate. If Unlock Driver Door 1st Push is programmed in Uconnect®, the
2
the doors when any of the following conditions are true: liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic release
· The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs.
· There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
on the liftgate. For further information, refer to "Uconnect®" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel."
To Lock The Liftgate
Entry door handle.
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
· Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors.
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock all doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the into the electronic liftgate release.
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location
To Lock The Vehicle's Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE:
· After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, 2 using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
· If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect® System, the key protection described in Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter in Vehicle remains active/functional.
· The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock button located on the vehicle's interior door panel.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver's door control all the door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Push the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
To open the window part way, push the window switch NOTE:
to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
· If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back
2
To stop the window from going all the way down during down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. switch again to close the window.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.
· Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls, push and release the window lockout button again (setting it in the UP position).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
LIFTGATE
To Lock The Liftgate
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button 2 electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only
electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion. lock the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built into
NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Push" is programmed in the electronic liftgate release.
EVIC/DID if equipped, all doors will unlock when you
push the electronic release on the liftgate. If Unlock
Driver Door 1st Push is programmed in Uconnect®, the
liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic release
on the liftgate For further information, refer to
"Uconnect®" in "Understanding Your Instrument
Panel."
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate -- If Equipped
Liftgate Entry
NOTE: Use the power door LOCK switch on either front door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors and the driver's door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing the electronic liftgate release (refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" located in "Things To Know Before Starting") or by pushing the LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Push the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by NOTE:
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the left side of the steering wheel on the instrument panel, or closed by pushing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. Push the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim panel once will close the liftgate only. This button cannot be used to open the
· In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate trim panel.
2
liftgate.
· If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect® settings),
WARNING!
and the liftgate chime will be audible. For further information, refer to Uconnect® in Understanding Your Instrument Panel."
During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below -22°F (-30°C) or temperatures above 150°F (65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pushing any of the power liftgate switches.
· If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
· There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
· The power liftgate must be in the full open position for rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the liftgate opening to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
open, push the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the liftgate and then push it again to close.
· If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
· If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation.
· If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
· If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power close. However, vehicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction.
WARNING!
· Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
· If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system 2 properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems: · Seat Belt Systems · Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags · Child Restraints
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to "Child Restraints")
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to Child Restraints) should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door and you could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Consumer Assistance.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Seat Belt Systems
the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both 2 and could cause a collision that includes you. This can outboard front seat belts are buckled.
happen far away from home or on your own street.
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver visual notification.
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with out- The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is in
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver's or outboard front passenger's (if equipped with BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
WARNING!
· Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. · It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. · Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. · Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued) · Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might 2 suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. · Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. · A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won't be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can't straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. · A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. · A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. · A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING! (Continued)
· A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
2
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate the latch plate.
2
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt.
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
anchor point.
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to
and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING!
· ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant's body is LESS than 6 inches.
· Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the 2 abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Restraints" section of this manual. The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) -- If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be equipped with Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to "Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt" under the "Child
· ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section so
WARNING!
as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you · Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of 2 will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
the webbing to retract completely in this case and then Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section. facing child restraint.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a · Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
click.
with a rear seat.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
· The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
· Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components: · Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) · Air Bag Warning Light · Steering Wheel and Column
· Instrument Panel
· Knee Impact Bolsters · Advanced Front Air Bags · Supplemental Side Air Bags
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" are embossed on
the air bag covers.
2
· Supplemental Knee Air Bags
· Front and Side Impact Sensors
· Seat Belt Pretenioners
· Seat Belt Buckle Switch
· Seat Track Position Sensors
· Occupant Classification System
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 -- Driver Advanced Front Air Bag 2 -- Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag 3 -- Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bolster 4 -- Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger Occupant Classification System ("OCS") that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant's seated weight input, as determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
· No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may 2 damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. · Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage -- for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Occupant Classification System (OCS) -- Front
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
Passenger Seat
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front pas-
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for senger's most probable classification. The OCM commu- 2
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Ad- nicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
vanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occu- reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
pant's seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the for the front passenger to be seated properly and prop-
following:
erly wearing the seat belt.
· Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) · Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat · Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
· The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects on it; or
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located · The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pasunderneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is lo- senger, including a child; or cated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
· The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child restraint; or
· The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status
Rear-facing child restraint
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Properly seated adult
Unoccupied seat
Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Reduced-power deployment
Reduced-power deployment OR Fullpower deployment
Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Reduced-power deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
· Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger's most probable classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
· Sitting upright
· Facing forward
· Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor
· Sitting with their back against the seatback and the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger's seated weight on the front passenger seat
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front passenger's seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
The front passenger's seated weight must be properly positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the most probable classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger's decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
· The front passenger's weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument panel).
· The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
· The front passenger's seatback is not in the full upright position.
· The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
Decreasing the front passenger's seated weight on the · Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat. front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
· Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and center console.
· Accessories that may change the seated weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.
· Anything that may decrease or increase the front passenger's seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger's most probable classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant's properly seated weight input, for example:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
Not Seated Properly
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING!
· If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated 2 improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant's properly seated weight input. This may result in serious injury or death in a collision.
· Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the seatback in an upright position, your back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
· Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different than the occupant's properly seated weight input, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working properly, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the air bag system.
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must function as designed.
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only Chrysler Group LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
· Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately.
· Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com- · Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an ponents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front aftermarket seat cover or cushion. Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
· Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Knee Impact Bolsters
· At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener driver and front passenger, and position the front occu- 2
be modified or replaced with any part except those pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC.
Air Bags.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
WARNING!
· Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.
· Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the front and rear (in vehicles equipped with rear seat SABs) seats. The SABs are marked with a "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback's trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the 2 space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Rear Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG."
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
WARNING!
· Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.
· Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
The SABICs and SABs ("Side Air Bags") are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller ("ORC") de- 2 termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
· Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.
· Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
· Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
(Continued)
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy.
event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and
2
Rollover Events
SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover experiences a near rollover event.
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of If A Deployment Occurs
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro- The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle immediately after deployment. damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
· The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
· As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
NOTE:
· Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
· Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
the battery has power or until the ignition is placed in
the "OFF" position.
2
· After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an · Unlock the doors automatically.
authorized dealer immediately.
System Reset Procedure
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Air Bag Warning Light
· Cut off fuel to the engine.
· Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition is placed in the "OFF" position.
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
· The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position.
· The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
· The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is 2 detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System ("SRS"), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the in-
WARNING!
strument panel.
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won't have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to the "Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel" section of this manual.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
· Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
· It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems per- non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- 2 vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
is designed to record such data as:
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
· How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
· Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
· How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelera-
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
tor and/or brake pedal; and,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
· How fast the vehicle was traveling.
ment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
There are different sizes and types of restraints for NOTE:
children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner's Manual
· For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1866SEATCHECK (7328243). Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada's website for additional information:
2
and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
· www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child re-
straint
Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle's seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Infants And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
2
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. · Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
It is recommended for children from birth until they with a rear seat.
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or Older Children And Child Restraints
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
· Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. · After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. · When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt If the answer to any of these questions was "no," then the
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the 2
over the front of the seat when their back is against the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the A child's squirming or slouching can move the seat belt
vehicle's seat belt alone:
out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or
the vehicle seat?
use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the
WARNING!
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child's shoulder between their neck and arm?
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs and not their stomach?
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Rear-Facing Child Restraint
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint
Combined Weight of the Child + Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an "X" Below
LATCH Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
Restraint System
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system 2 has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle's
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
· Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
· Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint?
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
65 lbs (29.5 kg) No
Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
2
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH anchorage system once the
combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint.
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be at-
No
tached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Can the head restraints be re-
Yes
moved?
Never "share" a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner's manual for more
information.
The head restraints may be removed in every rear seating posi-
tion.
Locating LATCH Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
2
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D and E are used for the left outboard position behind the driver (3). Anchorages C and D are used for the center seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH--compatible child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH--compatible position in your vehicle
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH system at the same time. If you can fit three child restraints in your vehicle, you must use the seatbelt to install the center child restraint and you must use the LATCH anchors for position (3) behind the driver. You
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
can use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's seat Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
belt for installing the third child seat in position (1) anchorages in this vehicle:
behind the front passenger.
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3): 2
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and
D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing
and buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restraint
an occupant or child restraint in the center seating
position.
2. Right outboard and center seating positions (1 and 2): Install the first child seat in the right outboard seating position using lower anchorages A and B. Install the second child seat using the center anchorages, C and D. Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the opposite door, E. Do not use the remaining left outboard seating position (3) for any occupant. The center child restraint will block the seat belt buckle for this position.
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCHcompatible child restraint in the center seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
· A child restraint installed in the center position (2) will block the seat belt buckle for the empty left outboard seat behind the driver (3). Do not use this seat for another occupant.
· Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · If you are installing three child restraints next to
each other, you must use the seat belt and the center tether anchor for the center position. You must use the LATCH anchors to install the child seat in position (3), behind the driver. You may use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's seat belt for installing the child seat in position (1), behind the front passenger. Please refer to "Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System" for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
2
belt, following the instructions below. See the section 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
"Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt" top tether anchorage. See the section "Installing Child
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for direc-
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tions to attach a tether anchor.
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
anchorages.
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for turer's instructions.
that seating position. For some second row seats, you 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to in any direction.
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child's reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
· Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
· Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Belt
Restraints In This Vehicle
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
2
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
"switched" into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the "Automatic Locking Mode" description un-
der "Occupant Restraints."
· ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor · Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a for-
ward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Yes
Can the head restraints be re-
Yes
moved?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
The head restraints may be removed in every rear seating posi-
tion.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of 2
position. For some second row seats, you may need to the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a vehicle seat.
"click."
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section "Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System" for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
2
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Anchorage Locations
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
· If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle."
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
· Do not leave children or animals inside parked 2 vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
cause serious injury or death. · It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
SAFETY TIPS
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
Transporting Passengers
belts.
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: · Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. · If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
Vehicle
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
Seat Belts
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
2
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for Defroster
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
system.
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Floor Mat Safety Information
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
Air Bag Warning Light
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
The light should come on and remain on for or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. · Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners. · Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. · Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning.
· Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
· If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Door Latches
The Vehicle
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Tires
Fluid Leaks
2
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected, or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 3 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Sun Visor "Slide-On-Rod" Feature -- If
Inside Day/Night Mirror -- If Equipped . . . .126
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Assist And 911 Rearview Mirror -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Rear Cross Path (RCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Power Folding Mirrors -- If Equipped. . . . . . .134 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Heated Mirrors -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .135 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors -- If Equipped . . .136 Power Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Manual Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Heated Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . .150 Front Ventilated Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . .151 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT -- IF EQUIPPED . . . .157
Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .158 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .161 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped . . . . . . .164 Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control -- If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) -- If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Fog Lights -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL -- IF
Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 3
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .173 To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .175 To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Windshield Wiper De-Icer -- If Equipped . . . .177 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .187
Rain Sensing Wipers -- If Equipped . . . . . . . .177 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .188
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .179 To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
HEATED STEERING WHEEL -- IF EQUIPPED . .180 To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .195 Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .200 Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .201 Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .204 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .216 FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
LANESENSE -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .218 LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST -- IF
ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .249
ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .250
ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .251 3
ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .251
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .233 PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM --
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active
Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .234
Park Assist System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .234 PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST
-- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER -- IF EQUIPPED . . .280
Closing Sunroof -- Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .281 Closing Sunroof -- Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .292
Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Venting Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .284 Opening Power Shade -- Express . . . . . . . . . .292
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .285 Opening Power Shade -- Manual Mode . . . . .293
Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Closing Power Shade -- Express . . . . . . . . . . .293
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Closing Power Shade -- Manual Mode . . . . . .293
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Opening Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Opening Sunroof -- Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .291
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .294 POWER INVERTER -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .298
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD -- IF EQUIPPED . .300
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Cargo Extension Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Wireless Charging Pad Operation . . . . . . . . . .301 Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops . . . . . . . .308
CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Rear Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 3
Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Flip 'n StowTM Front Passenger Seat Storage -- If ROOF LUGGAGE RACK -- IF EQUIPPED . . . .312 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror -- If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror Assist And 911 Rearview Mirror -- If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be NOTE: The ASSIST and 911 features operate through
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only
operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is
active. Refer to your "Uconnect® System supplement
manual" for further information.
3
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:
Assist And 911 Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a 9-1-1 button.
· Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just press the Assist button and you'll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you're driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
· Uconnect® Access Customer Care In-vehicle support for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via Mobile features.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all other vehicle issues.
9-1-1 Call
1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call connection, press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator: · Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
· The vehicle brand.
· The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle's 5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 opera- emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tor may be able to open a voice connection with the tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
WARNING!
3
vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
· If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle's electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle's electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle's electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT® FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1 Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
· The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
· The Phone Screen will display the following message Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
"Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your beyond Chrysler Group LLC's control may prevent or
dealer."
stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but
· An In-Vehicle Audio message will state "Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer."
are not limited to, the following factors: · The ignition key has been removed from the ignition
3
and the delayed accessories mode is active.
WARNING!
· The ignition key is in OFF position.
· Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
· The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the air bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the ORC
· The vehicle's electrical systems are not intact.
· The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash.
· The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
· Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
system immediately.
· Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
· Wireless network congestion.
· Weather.
· Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle's wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
3
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switches are located on the driver's door trim panel.
Power Mirror Switches
1 -- Mirror Direction Control 2 -- Left And Right Mirror Select
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Models With Expush Window Feature
Power Folding Mirrors -- If Equipped
Push and release the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right) and then push one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing. The selection will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position following an adjustment.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the instrument panel to return the power mirrors to pre-programmed positions. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Models Without Expush Window Feature
Push the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right) and then push one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph · The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
speeds.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they by pushing the button. (This may require multiple button
will automatically unfold.
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
3
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
Heated Mirrors -- If Equipped
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the following occurs:
· The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
· The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/ unfolded.
· The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors -- If Equipped
Sun Visor "Slide-On-Rod" Feature -- If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
The sun visor "Slide-On-Rod" feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) -- IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both 3 sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
· The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
· The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.)
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
3
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service.
Stationary Objects
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicles mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the 3 driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/ Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating SEATS
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and vehicle. used.
General Information
WARNING!
3
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
· It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats -- If Equipped
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
Some models may be equipped with a power driver's seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the seat up, down, forward or rearward.
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward. Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switch
Power Seat Recliner Switch
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar -- If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
3 Power Lumbar Switch
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seats -- If Equipped
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
· Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
· Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Front Seat Adjustment
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, 3 which could result in serious injury or death.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment -- If Equipped
The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Recline Lever
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· Press the heated seat button setting ON.
once to turn the HI
· Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the LO setting ON.
· Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements OFF.
Seat Height Adjustment Front Heated Seats -- If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting 3 in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
· Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
Front Ventilated Seats -- If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
(Continued)
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
· Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
· Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose LO.
· Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Reactive Head Restraints -- Front Seats
3
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the release button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
Release Button
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the release button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear head restraints have two positions UP and DOWN. When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position. When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
Release Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat Feature
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room.
belts. · Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
3
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary using a seat belt properly.
to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi- Rear Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the seat
easily.
near the floor and release it when the seat is at the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
WARNING!
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
· It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, have latched.
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people To Lower The Rear Seat
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously 1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper
injured or killed.
outer edge of the seat or pull the pull strap located on
(Continued)
the middle outer edge of the seat.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Recliner Adjustment
Rear Seatback Release Lever And Pull Strap 2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.
The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger comfort. Pull on the pull strap while sitting in the rear seat to recline the seatback.
To Raise The Rear Seat
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.
Rear Seat Recliner Pull Strap
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT -- IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of 3 desired radio station presets.
The memory switch is located on the driver's side door panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to activate the memory save function, the number (1) memory button and the number (2) memory button. The memory switch allows the driver to recall either of the two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the appropriate number button on the switch.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory switch, then push the number (1) button within five seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), will display which memory position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into memory as follows:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON position.
Driver Memory Switch Programming The Memory Feature
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory.
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON position.
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory switch, then push the number (2) button within five seconds. The EVIC/DID will display which memory position is being set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
NOTE:
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
· For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
must select the "Memory To FOB" feature through the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
3
· For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following:
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall a
memory profile.
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
· To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer to "Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory" in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles with a push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to Programming The Memory Feature in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory switch, then within five seconds push and release the button labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. "Memory Profile Set" (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC/DID.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC/DID. For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will display in the EVIC/DID.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, push MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the Entry and Easy Exit position.
vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
· When you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
3
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for
when you cycle the vehicles ignition to the ACC or further information.
RUN position. TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
· The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) Two latches must be released to open the hood.
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the drivers benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit side of the instrument panel. or Easy Entry.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Hood Release
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull the safety latch release lever forward (toward you). The safety latch release lever is located behind the center front edge of the hood.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
operation of the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights -- if equipped, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights -- if equipped.
3
LIGHTS Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. This switch controls the
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Headlight Time Delay
NOTE:
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination · The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
vehicle in an unlit area.
feature.
3
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF · The headlight delay time is programmable using the
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
information.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control -- If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized dealer.
To Activate
· Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.
· To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle highbeam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon ignition off.
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the system.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Fog Lights -- If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the
3
engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps
are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the
engine is shut Off.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver's door is opened.
Fog Light Switch
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and push the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Lane Change Assist
· If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is three times then automatically turn off. moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is High/Low Beam Switch
3
defective.
· A "Turn Signal On" message will appear in the EVIC/
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
DID and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
Flash-To-Pass
· When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can be turned on by pushing a
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
switch on either side of the console. To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pushed, or when the dimmer control is turned completely upward to the second detent.
There are courtesy lights located above the front seats. The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a second time.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the drivers side of the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the Ambient Light Control -- If Equipped
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or down-
the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted ward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambi-
cupholders -- if equipped.
ent light located in the overhead console, door handle
lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and 3
cubby bin lights.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dome Light Position
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the instrument panel dimmer control is in this position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open.
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
3
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper operation.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the "park" position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot return to the "park" position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
3
Intermittent Wiper Operation NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
Windshield Washer Operation
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever upward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping cycle.
Mist Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Windshield Wiper De-Icer -- If Equipped
resume previous operation except, if the Windshield
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper Wiper De-Icer timer and operation shall continue.
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following Rain Sensing Wipers -- If Equipped
conditions:
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and 3
· Activation By Front Defrost -- The Windshield Wiper automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of a feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
when the ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C). the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
· Activation By Rear Defrost -- The Windshield Wiper to activate this feature.
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
defrost is turned on and when the ambient tempera- multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
ture is below 33° F (0.6° C).
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
· Activation By Remote Start Operation -- When remote start is active and the outside ambient temperature is less than 33° F (0.6° C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer shall be enabled. On exiting remote start
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
· The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
· Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
· The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the following conditions:
· Low Ambient Temperature -- When the ignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
· Transmission In NEUTRAL Position -- When the ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever/gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit -- On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
3
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To lock the steering column in position, push the control handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL -- IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
· Push the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element ON.
· Push the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating element OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
WARNING!
· Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
· Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over 1 -- ON/OFF
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
2 -- SET+/ACCEL 3 -- RESUME
4 -- SET-/DECEL 5 -- CANCEL
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
To Deactivate
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Under-
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the standing Your Instrument Panel" for more information.
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with- The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
out erasing the set speed from memory.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
3
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition U.S. Speed (mph)
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Push the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) -- IF
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on EQUIPPED
moderate hills is normal.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
3
Control.
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
WARNING!
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
· If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
· Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
· Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to "Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode" in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected.
· Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
WARNING! (Continued)
· The ACC system: · Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). · Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions. · Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings. · Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving within 3 minutes the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled.
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system: · When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., 3 in highway construction zones). · When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes. · When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. · When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
(Continued)
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 -- NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF 2 -- SET+/ACCEL 3 -- RESUME 4 -- SET-/DECEL 5 -- DISTANCE SETTING -- INCREASE 6 -- ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF 7 -- DISTANCE SETTING -- DECREASE 8 -- CANCEL
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) displays "ACC Ready."
When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off."
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following To Activate/Deactivate
conditions:
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
· When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC/DID
· When you apply the brakes.
displays "ACC Ready."
3
· When the parking brake is set.
· When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
· When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
· When the brakes are overheated.
· When the driver door is open.
· When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the EVIC/DID will display "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off."
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET + button or the SET - button and release. The EVIC/DID will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle · The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Drive position.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do · The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
speed. If this occurs:
· The vehicle parking brake is applied.
3
· The message "DRIVER OVERRIDE" will display in the EVIC/DID.
· Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
· The system will not be controlling the distance be- · Driver door is opened at low speeds.
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle · A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
· The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
To Cancel
To Turn Off
The following conditions cancel the system: · The brake pedal is applied. · The CANCEL button is pushed.
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if:
· The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button is pushed.
· An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button is pushed.
· The ignition is turned OFF.
· You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume) button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC/DID will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
· If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two seconds, then the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
· ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to " Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen · If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
U.S. Speed (mph)
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID.
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph To Decrease Speed
3
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to " Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID.
· When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the engine's braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID.
NOTE:
· When you override and push the SET + button or SET - buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of the vehicle.
· The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
· The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC/DID.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
3
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting -- Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the 3 set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the EVIC/DID displays the "Sensed Vehicle Indicator" icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting -- Increase button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
· The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed.
· The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The distance setting is changed.
· The system disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert "BRAKE" will flash in the EVIC/DID and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE: The "Brake!" Screen in the EVIC/DID is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Overtake Aid
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
When driving with ACC engaged and following a Target seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
vehicle, the system will provide an additional accelera- will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or
tion to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left existing Set Speed.
3
or right turn signal. The Overtake Aid will only provide NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
additional acceleration if the vehicle moves with the standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the
corresponding turn signal and until the current set speed parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
is reached. The ACC system will automatically detect be cancelled.
traffic direction in the respective lane when the right or left turn signal is utilized.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
ACC Operation At Stop
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to will be cancelled.
a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC/DID displays the current ACC system settings. The EVIC/DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the EVIC/DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off."
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready."
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC/DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
activity occurs, which may include any of the following: in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
· System Cancel
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display
· Driver Override
"ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" and 3
· System Off
the system will deactivate.
· ACC Proximity Warning
The "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
· ACC Unavailable Warning
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
· The EVIC/DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
Display Warnings And Maintenance
this warning may temporarily occur.
"Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle" Warning
The "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For additional information refer to "Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode" in this section.
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the "Adaptive Cruise Control Off" state and will resume function by simply reactivating it.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:
· Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens.
· Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment.
· If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
· Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
NOTE:
· If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.
· Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
"Clean Front Windshield" Warning
The "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" warning will display and also a chime will
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per- back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil- require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC/DID
When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
3
will display "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield" and the system will have degraded Front Windshield" message occurs frequently (e.g. more
performance.
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
The "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" message can sometimes be displayed while
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW Service ACC/FCW Warning
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays "ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required" or "Cruise/ FCW Unavailable Service Required", there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
3
Turn Or Bend Example
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
3
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control Mode
WARNING!
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) warning does not activate and no alarm will sound 3 Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h). maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is To change between the different control modes, push the selected. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) To Set A Desired Speed
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID display.
To Decrease Speed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, · Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
3
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Under- · If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel" for more information. continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
flected in the EVIC/DID display.
U.S. Speed (mph)
To Cancel
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID display.
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the memory:
· The brake pedal is applied.
· The CANCEL button is pushed.
· The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The vehicle parking brake is applied.
· You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
· The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over- · The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
heated).
pushed.
· The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
Drive position.
MITIGATION -- IF EQUIPPED
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:
· The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button is pushed.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
· The ignition is turned off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle com-
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
When the system determines that a forward collision is two seconds and then release the brakes.
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
3
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate
FCW Message
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
· The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2 km/h).
· The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
· It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
NOTE: The default status of FCW is "On", this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
· The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If The forward collision button is located on the switch the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should panel below the Uconnect® display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
· Changing the FCW status to "Off" prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
· Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near
3
warns the driver later.
Forward Collision Button To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward collision button again to turn the system ON (LED turns off).
· Changing the Active Braking status to "Off" prevents the system from providing limited active braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision, but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
NOTE:
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
The default status of FCW is the "Far" setting and the Active Braking is the "On" setting, this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away and it applies limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the "Near" setting, allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This setting provides less reaction time than the "Far" setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
· The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down.
· FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
· FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the EVIC/DID displays "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality" or "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
limited the system performance is no longer present, the LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
system will return to its full performance state. If the detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
within the lane boundaries.
Service FCW Warning If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:
When both lane markings are detected and the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal 3 applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn-
· ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
· Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
or Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt the driver
LANESENSE -- IF EQUIPPED LaneSense Operation
to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above When only a single lane marking is detected and the 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
visual warning through the EVIC/DID to prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense system will monitor if the driver's hands are on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the driver when the driver's hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is "OFF". The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect® display.
LaneSense Warning Button
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the LaneSense button to turn the system ON (LED turns off). A "Lane Sense On" message is shown in the EVIC/DID.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message 3
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
3.5 EVIC Screen -- If Equipped
Lane Sense On Message
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
Left Lane Departure -- Only Left Lane Detected
· When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the EVIC if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure -- Both Lanes Detected 3
· When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is "armed" to provide visual
warnings in the EVIC and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure oc-
curs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
· When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn
solid white. The LaneSense indicator changes from
solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
· When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense indicator changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
· For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
7.0 DID Screen -- If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
3
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line, Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Left Lane Departure -- Only Left Lane Detected
· When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
· When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure -- Both Lanes Detected
· When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is "armed" to provide visual warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
3
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator) · When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
· When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
· For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" 3 in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE:
· When enabled the system operates above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure.
· Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
· The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes, traction control system, electronic stability control, forward collision warning, etc.).
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever/gear selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
EVIC/DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the de- left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
tected obstacle. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" for the display will show the single arc moving closer to the 3
further information.
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will display the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
3
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs -- Left
Arcs -- Center Arcs -- Right Audible Alert Chime
Radio Volume Reduced
Greater than 79 in
(200 cm)
None
79-59 in (200-150 cm)
None
None
6th Solid
None
None
None No
Single 1/2Second Tone (for rear cen-
ter only)
Yes
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in (150-
120 cm)
47-39 in (120-
100 cm)
None
None
5th Solid 4th Solid
None
None
Slow (for rear center
only)
Yes
Slow (for rear center
only)
Yes
39-25 in (10065 cm)
25-12 in (65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
None
3rd Flashing None
Fast (for rear center
only) Yes
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
Yes
Yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, When the ParkSense® switch is pushed to disable the
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
system, the instrument cluster will display the
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
"PARKSENSE OFF" message for approximately five seconds. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" or 3
ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further informa-
the Uconnect® display.
tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the
"PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
ParkSense® Switch
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC/DID will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
· Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
· Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
· When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument clus- bumper.
ter will display "PARKSENSE OFF" Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
· Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense® system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
3
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
· When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC/ DID will display "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
· ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
· Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message to be displayed in the EVIC/DID.
· ParkSense® should be disabled when the liftgate is in the open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An open liftgate could provide a false indication that an
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not obstacle is behind the vehicle.
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
· ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
· The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
· Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. · Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
· Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not available.
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and · Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense® Park Assist system or the Braking System Module.
3
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse parking maneu-
· The automatic braking function may only be applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
ver if the system detects a possible collision with an · The automatic braking function may not be applied
obstacle.
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
NOTE:
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
· The driver can override the automatic braking func- · The automatic braking function can be enabled/ tion by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense® off disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features via ParkSense® switch, or changing the gear while the section of the Uconnect® System.
automatic brakes are being applied.
· ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration
state for the automatic braking function through igni-
tion cycles.
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
· The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle.
· The system is provided to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver.
· The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's acceleration and braking and is responsible for the vehicle's movements.
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of these shift lever positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear in the EVIC/DID indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense® The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ParkSense® Active Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings
Park Assist System section for further information.
to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/ and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. 3
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect
Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or 7 Driver Information Display (DID)" for further infor-
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in mation.
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal ParkSense® Display
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
Rear Park Assist
ParkSense® Warning Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will display the park assist ready system status.
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.
Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
3 Slow Tone/Solid Arc
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
3
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs -- Left
Greater than 79 in
(200 cm)
None
79-59 in (200-150 cm)
None
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in (150-
120 cm)
47-39 in (120-
100 cm)
None
None
Arcs -- Center Arcs -- Right Audible Alert Chime
Radio Volume Reduced
None None None
No
6th Solid
None
Single 1/2Second Tone (for rear cen-
ter only) Yes
5th Solid
None
Slow (for rear center
only) Yes
4th Solid
None
Slow (for rear center
only) Yes
39-25 in
25-12 in
(100-65 cm) (65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
None
3rd Flashing None
Fast (for rear center
only) Yes
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
1st Flashing 1st Flashing 1st Flashing Continuous
Yes
Yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
Front Park Assist
left and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
When the vehicle is in DRIVE or NON-REVERSE for the display will show the single arc moving closer to the 3 manual transmission, the ParkSense® Warning screen vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the display will show a single arc in the center front region. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone when the 1st flashing arc appears.
No Tone/Solid Arc
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
No Tone/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
3
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Distance (in/cm)
Arcs -- Left Arcs -- Center Arcs -- Right Audible Alert
Chime Radio Volume
Reduced
Greater than 47 in (120 cm)
None None None None
No
WARNING ALERTS
47-39 in (120-100 cm)
39-25 in (100-65 cm)
None
None
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
None
None
None
None
No
No
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
25-12 in (65-30 cm) 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing
Fast
Yes
Less than 12 in (30 cm) 1st Flashing 1st Flashing 1st Flashing Continuous
Yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and the Uconnect® display.
brake pedal is applied.
3
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
If the Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume settings will not be accessible from the EVIC/DID.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
ParkSense® Switch
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the ParkSense® switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for approximately five seconds. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS, or the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for five seconds. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to Reverse and the system has detected a faulted condition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) will display a PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car graphic will be displayed with UNAVAILABLE at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These If the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
arc alerts will interrupt the PARKSENSE UNAVAIL- QUIRED message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAIL- authorized dealer.
ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS, or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED messages if an object
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
3
is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Dis- age the sensors.
play (DID)" for further information.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
NOTE:
SORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information · Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear system operating properly.
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
· Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense®.
an authorized dealer.
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF." Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
· When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF" for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
· ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
· Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
· Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense® system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
· ParkSense® should be disabled when the liftgate is in the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
· There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking application to be delayed.
CAUTION!
· ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
· The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
· Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
WARNING! (Continued)
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. 3 You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. · Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
· The system is provided to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver.
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is intended to assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling the steering wheel. The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is defined as "semi-automatic" since the driver maintains control of the accelerator, shift lever and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
· The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and must intervene as required.
· During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the driver will be required to manually complete the parking maneuver.
· The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
· New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30 miles accumulated before the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accurately. This is due to the system's dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the performance of the feature.
The system will also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differences such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active Park Assist System
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect® display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
3
ParkSense® Active Park Assist Switch To enable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system, push the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system, push the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns off).
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will turn off automatically for any of the following conditions:
· The parking maneuver is completed.
· Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when searching for a parking space.
· Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space.
· Touching the steering wheel during active steering guidance into the parking space.
· Pushing the ParkSense® Front and Rear Park Assist switch.
· Driver's door is opened.
· Rear liftgate is opened.
· Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System intervention.
· The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE (automatic transmission) or forward gear (manual transmission) and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the system will cancel and the EVIC/ DID will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will only operate and search for a parking space when the following conditions are present:
· Gear position is in DRIVE (automatic transmission) or in a forward gear (manual transmission).
· Ignition is in the RUN position.
· ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch is activated.
· Driver's door is closed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
· Rear liftgate is closed.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
· Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
Display
When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately enabled the "Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to
15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC/DID will instruct the driver Switch to Perpendicular" message will appear in the 3
to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approxi- EVIC/DID display. You may switch to perpendicular
mately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the left side
driver must then reactivate the system by pushing the steering wheel switch to change your parking space
ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch.
setting.
· The outer surface and the underside of the front and NOTE:
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction.
· When searching for a parking space, use the turn
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not present.
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
· The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/ clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
· When seeking for a parking space, the driver should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
· The feature will only indicate the last detected parking space (example: if passing multiple available parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected parking space for the maneuver).
Active ParkSense Searching
When an available parking space has been found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking sequence.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
3
Space Found -- Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to stop the vehicle's movement and remove your hands from the steering wheel.
Space Found -- Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Space Found -- Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings -- Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
· When the system instructs the driver to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
· The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE (automatic
3
transmission) or forward gear (manual transmission)
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
within six shifts, the system will cancel and the EVIC/
DID will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
Check Surroundings -- Move Backward NOTE:
· It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
· The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space. The system will provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
· If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicle's movement.
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings -- STOP
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
3
Check Surroundings -- Shift To Drive
When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings -- Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move forward.
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Check Surroundings -- Move Forward
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicle's movement.
Check Surroundings -- STOP
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete.
3
Check Surroundings -- Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings -- Wait For Steering To Complete
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's parking position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK. The Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position message will be momentarily displayed.
Check Surroundings -- Move Backward
Active ParkSense Complete -- Check Parking Position
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display
When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is enabled, the "Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to Switch to Perpendicular" message will show in the EVIC/DID display. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel parking if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking maneuver, the "Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to Switch to Parallel" message will appear in the EVIC/DID display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
3 Active ParkSense Searching Display
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.
· The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
· The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/ clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
· When seeking for a parking space, the driver should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
· The feature will only indicate the last detected parking space (example: if passing multiple available parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected parking space for the maneuver).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
When an available parking space has been found, and the Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move stop the vehicle's movement and remove your hands forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular from the steering wheel. parking sequence.
3
Space Found -- Keep Moving Forward
Space Found -- Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Space Found -- Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings -- Wait For Steering To Complete
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
The system will then instruct the driver to check their NOTE:
surroundings and move backward.
· It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
3
· When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
Check Surroundings -- Move Backward
· The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE (automatic transmission) or forward gear (manual transmission) and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the system will cancel and the EVIC/ DID will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space. The system will provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
· If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicle's movement.
Check Surroundings -- STOP
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete.
3
Check Surroundings -- Shift To Drive
Check Surroundings -- Wait For Steering To Complete
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings -- Move Forward
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicle's movement.
Check Surroundings -- STOP
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete.
3
Check Surroundings -- Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings -- Wait For Steering To Complete
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward.
shift to PARK. The Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position message will be momentarily displayed.
Check Surroundings -- Move Backward
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position. When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's parking position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
Active ParkSense Complete -- Check Parking Position
CAUTION!
· The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
· The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/ her shoulder when using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
WARNING!
· Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system. 3 Always check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Before using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA -- IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate.
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the hitch/receiver.
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
3
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the the vehicle.
vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the each zone:
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
Zone
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION! (Continued) · To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
CAUTION!
· To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
(Continued)
GARAGE DOOR OPENER -- IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle's battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the headliner NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink® rity Alarm is active.
channels.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
The HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button.
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.
3
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds, or until the red indicator flashes.
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
· If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener 1 -- Door Opener 2 -- Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to Firmly push and release the "LEARN" or "TRAIN-
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to ING" button. On some garage door openers/devices
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
light in view.
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 3
program while you push and hold the hand-held step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
transmitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the activates, programming is complete.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Programming A Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you would like to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
and observe the indicator light.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
· If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- not release the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Programming A Non-Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all
3
· To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, remaining steps.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT Canadian/Gate Operator Programming erase the channels.
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
that require the transmitter signals to "time-out" after
(Non -- Rolling Code)
several seconds of transmission.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button, while you press and release ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE: · If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
· To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
Using HomeLink®
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To operate, push and release the programmed
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
follow these steps: 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office light- 3 ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until also be used at any time.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn 3. Without releasing the button proceed with in your vehicle.
"Canadian/Gate Operator Programming" step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions: · Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
· Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
· Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
· Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
· Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a "stop and reverse" feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
General Information
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE -- IF
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry EQUIPPED
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following The power sunroof switches are located to the left
two conditions:
between the sun visors on the overhead console. 3
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
· The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
· The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switches
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power shade switches are located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Shade Switches
WARNING!
· Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
· In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
and automatically stop. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof -- Manual Mode 3
A comfort stop position is a programmed automatic stop
Opening Sunroof -- Express
for the sunroof open position. The comfort stop position has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting.
A comfort stop position and full open position are the programmed automatic stops for the sunroof open positions. The comfort stop position has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting.
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward. The sunroof will stop automatically at the comfort stop position (if the sunshade is in the closed position when the operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half open to the half open position prior to the sunroof
second. The sunroof will open automatically to the opening). Push and hold the switch rearward again, the
comfort stop position (if the sunshade is in the closed sunroof will open to the full open position and automati-
position when the operation is initiated the sunshade will cally stop. Any release of the switch will stop the
automatically open to the half open position prior to the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
sunroof opening). Push the switch rearward and release partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
it again, the sunroof will open to the full open position held rearward again.
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Sunroof -- Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Close". During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof -- Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again.
Venting Sunroof -- Express
Push and release the Vent button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called "Express Vent", and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent position.
Opening Power Shade -- Express
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the shade will automatically open to the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the switch a second time from the halfway position and the shade will automatically open to the full open position and stop automatically. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop the shade.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
Opening Power Shade -- Manual Mode
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward. half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again
The shade will open and stop automatically at the will automatically close both the sunroof and shade
half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch completely.
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to Closing Power Shade -- Manual Mode
3
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again.
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
Closing Power Shade -- Express
again.
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the shade will close automatically from any position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Close". During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the shade.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express Close.
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/ Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either a "key" or a "battery" symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a "key" are powered when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a "battery" are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on the center stack of the instrument panel.
NOTE:
3
· All accessories connected to the "battery" powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
· To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR® knob and element must be used.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Front Electrical Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet has power available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.
NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to "battery" powered all the time by switching the power outlet Power Distribution Center panel fuse from fuse location F91 to F81.
Rear Electrical Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Electrical Power Outlet Fuse
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
· Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
3
· Do not touch with wet hands.
· Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
· If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Electrical Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 -- F75 Fuse 20A Yellow Front Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter Console Bin 2 -- F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position) 3 -- F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery powered at all times) 4 -- F60 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
· Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
· Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
· After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
POWER INVERTER -- IF EQUIPPED
Power Inverter Location There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in the device. The outlet automatically turns off when the device is unplugged.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
· Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
· Do not touch with wet hands.
3
· Close the lid when not in use.
· If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD -- IF EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless charging pad located inside the upper portion of the center console. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that uses magnetic induction to transfer power to your mobile device.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless charging, be equipped with an aftermarket sleeve or equipped with a back plate from your mobile phone provider, or an online or local electronics retailer.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your mobile phone in place and an LED indicator light.
NOTE: Visit UconnectPhone.com for supported mobile phones and compatible aftermarket sleeves.
Wireless Charging Pad Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
To use the wireless charging pad, the coil in your mobile
phone needs to align with the coil in the charging pad,
which is located directly under the Qi logo. Since each
mobile phone's coil location is different, you may need a
3
few attempts to locate the correct spot for your mobile
phone:
1. Place your mobile phone on the wireless charging pad, towards the Qi logo, so that the LED turns red. If the LED does not turn red, pick up the mobile phone and change the location.
2. Once the LED transitions from red to flashing green, your mobile phone is correctly placed and charging.
Mobile Phone Alignment
NOTE: The mobile phone must be aligned around the Qi logo for the LED to transition from red to flashing green.
3. If the LED does not transition from red to flashing green, and just turns off, pick up your mobile phone and reposition it on the charging pad.
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Adjust the wireless charging pad mobile phone cradle to hold the mobile phone in position. The cradle moves by pushing down on the finger tabs and adjusting the cradle in or out.
NOTE: The initial adjustment will only need to be done once as long as only one mobile phone is used. If a different mobile phone is used, the cradle will need to be readjusted.
The LED indicator will flash green while the mobile phone is charging. The Qi enabled phone is able to function normally as it is charging.
Adjustable Mobile Phone Charging Pad Cradle
WARNING!
Do not place metal object(s) between the mobile phone and wireless charging pad. Metal object(s) such as coins, rings or keys will become very HOT. If metal object(s) become lodged between the mobile phone and wireless charging pad, carefully remove the mobile phone and allow the metal object(s) to cool before removing. Failure to wait until the object(s) cool could result in personal injury, including burns.
CAUTION!
Do not place your vehicle Key Fob on the wireless charging pad, the Keyless Enter-N-GoTM feature may not work properly while a mobile phone is being charged.
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers, located in the center console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
3
Front Cupholders
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers, located in the center armrest.
STORAGE Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passengers side of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the latch to open the glove compartment.
There is also an additional storage bin located above the instrument panel in the center of the dash.
Rear Cupholders
Glove Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305
Console Storage Compartment
Some vehicles may be equipped with a wireless charging
pad located in the upper portion of the center console.
Refer to Wireless Charging Pad-If Equipped in this
section for more information.
3
Upper Console Charging Pad
306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
Center Console
The center console has a storage area which can hold cell phones, PDAs, and other small items.
Center Console Storage
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
Flip 'n StowTM Front Passenger Seat Storage -- If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with storage under the front passenger seat cushion. Pull upward on the seat cushion loop to open the storage compartment.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307
3
Passenger Seat Cushion Loop
Passenger Seat Cushion Storage Compartment
NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it latches to the base.
308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs (181 kg).
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room. Refer to "Seats" in this section for further information.
Cargo Extension Panels
Cargo extension panels can be folded and unfolded. When the rear seats are moved to the more forward positions and the rear seat backs are folded down, the extension panels can be unfolded manually by hand (2 of them). The extension panels can be used to extend the load floor to the rear seats and/or hide the gap between the load floor and rear seats, or to assist in loading large items into the cargo area.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
WARNING!
· Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
· To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 309
WARNING! (Continued)
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
3
· Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
· Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
sible.
· Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
· Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
310 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Storage Bins
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle on the sides of the load floor.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.
Rear Storage Bins
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 311
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to Rear Window Defroster
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
The rear window defroster button is located on
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
the switch bank by the manual climate controls.
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster 3
pushed while in the intermittent setting, the and the heated outside mirrors. An indicator in the
wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off minutes of operation, push the button a second time.
position, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the lever is released the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the "park" position.
312 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· The Windshield Wiper De-Icer (if equipped) shall be activated automatically when the Rear Defrost is turned on and when the ambient temperature is below 33 degrees F (0.6° C).
· To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION! (Continued) · Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. · Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK -- IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: · Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at a Chrysler dealer through Mopar® parts.
(Continued)
External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
CAUTION!
· To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
· Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
· Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 313
CAUTION! (Continued) · Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby 3 truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .318 EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER -- BASE . . . . . . . . . .319 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .346
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER -- PREMIUM . . . . . .320 DID Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .321 Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 EVIC Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 EVIC Yellow Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 EVIC Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
DID Red Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 DID Yellow Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 DIESEL MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Uconnect® SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Customer Programmable Features/Personal Settings -- Uconnect® 5.0 Settings . . . . . . . . .365
Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Customer Programmable Features/Personal Settings -- Uconnect® 8.4 Personal Settings . . .383
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Uconnect® RADIOS -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .403
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED . .403
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .428
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .406 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .406
Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .407
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . .443 Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 4 SiriusXM Travel LinkTM (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . .448 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 -- Air Demister Outlet
5 -- Instrument Cluster
2 -- Air Outlet
6 -- Electronic Speed Control
3 -- Electronic Vehicle Information 7 -- Storage Compartment
Center (EVIC)/ Driver Information
Display (DID) Controls
4 -- Horn/Driver Air Bag
8 -- Radio
9 -- Passenger Air Bag 10 -- Glove Compartment 11 -- Lower Switch Bank
13 -- Start/Stop Ignition Button 14 -- Liftgate Release Button 15 -- Dimmer Switches
12 -- Uconnect® Hard Controls/ 16 -- Headlight Switch Climate Controls/Electric Stop
Start -- If Equipped
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER -- BASE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER -- PREMIUM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
5. Brake Warning Light
1. Tachometer
This light monitors various brake functions,
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
including brake fluid level and parking brake
(RPM x 1000).
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate the parking brake is applied, the brake
2. High Beam Indicator
fluid level is low, or there is a problem with the anti-lock 4
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
brake system reservoir.
3. Front Fog Light Indicator -- If Equipped
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
4. Park/Headlight ON Indicator -- If Equipped
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
This indicator will illuminate when the park In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
lights or headlights are turned on.
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
tion.
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is must be reset at zero.
4
necessary.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
6. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or shows the EVIC/DID messages. Refer to "Electronic
Driver Information Display (DID)
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Informa-
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve- tion Display (DID)" as equipped located in "Understand-
hicle has been driven.
ing Your Instrument Panel."
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of 7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
8. ECO Light
This light is activated via hard button on the center stack to display your driving habits.
9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light -- If Equipped
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
NOTE:
11. Speedometer
· The "ESC Off Indicator Light" and the "ESC Indicates Digital Speedometer (MPH or km/h). Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned 12. Air Bag Warning Light
to ON/RUN.
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
· Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first 4
ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
previously.
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho-
· The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Occupant
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the Vehicle" for further information.
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
13. Seat Belt Reminder Light
10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light -- If Equipped
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
trol (ESC) is off.
check, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
14. Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone will chime, and an EVIC/DID message will appear if either turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS to continue to function properly.
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
CAUTION!
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not The TPMS has been optimized for the original operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and 4 combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the warning have been established for the tire size system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operaapproximately one minute and then remain continuously tion or sensor damage may result when using reilluminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- placement equipment that is not of the same size, quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety sensor to become inoperable. After using an afterof reasons, including the installation of replacement or market tire sealant it is recommended that you take alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the sensor function checked. TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
16. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.
17. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H" pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H" and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see "Maintaining Your
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Vehicle". Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
18. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of converter damage and power loss will soon occur. 4
an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that Immediate service is required.
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
WARNING!
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
not require towing.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
19. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming. The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set. The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Location
The EVIC Menu items consist of the following: · Speedometer · Vehicle Info · Driver Assist · Fuel Economy · Trip · Audio · Messages · Screen Setup
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:
4
EVIC Control Buttons
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· UP Arrow Button
· BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll upward through the main menu and submenus.
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
· DOWN Arrow Button
· OK Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu and submenus.
· RIGHT Arrow Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
EVIC Display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
3. Engine Temperature Warning Light
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the 4. EVIC Display Area
cluster and consists of eight sections:
5. LaneSense -- If Equipped
6. Fuel Gauge
7. Low Fuel Telltale
4
8. Rear Axle Lock Indicator -- If Equipped
9. Reconfigurable Yellow Telltale Display
10. Manual Speed Assist (MSA) Speed Warning Telltale -- If Equipped
11. Speed For Electronic Speed Control Setting -- If Equipped
1. Electronic Park Brake Failure -- If Equipped
12. Reconfigurable Telltale Area
2. Brake Warning Light
13. Reconfigurable Red Telltale Display
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. 4WD LOW Indicator Light -- If Equipped
15. SERV 4WD Indicator Light -- If Equipped
16. Temperature Gauge
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "Oil Change Due" message will display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
EVIC Yellow Telltales
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
· Service Adaptive Cruise Control Telltale
This area will show reconfigurable yellow caution tell-
This light will illuminate when an ACC is not
tales. These telltales include:
operating and needs service. For further infor-
· Forward Collision Telltale
mation, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of
This telltale will illuminate to warn you of a Your Vehicle." possible collision with the vehicle in front of you. · Low Fuel Telltale
4
· Service Stop/Start System Telltale -- If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required.
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L), this light will illuminate and remain on until fuel is added.
· Transmission Over Temperature Telltale -- If Equipped
This telltale indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this telltale illuminates, safely pull over and
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
· Service 4WD Telltale
· LaneSense Failure Telltale
This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the LaneSense Departure has detected a failure.
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
· Diesel Wait To Start Telltale -- If Equipped
The "Wait To Start" telltale will illuminate for approximately two seconds when the ignition is turned to the RUN position. It's duration may be longer based on colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is out. Refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
· Diesel Low Diesel Exhaust Telltale -- If Equipped This telltale will illuminate to indicate the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is low.
· Rear Axle Locker Telltale This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been activated.
· Washer Fluid Telltale This telltale will illuminate to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
· Diesel Water In Fuel Telltale -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
EVIC Red Telltales
The "Water In Fuel Indicator Light" will illu- This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
minate when there is water detected in the fuel telltales include:
filters. If this light remains illuminated, DO · Charging System Light
NOT start the vehicle before you drain the
water from the fuel filters to prevent engine damage. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures/Draining Fuel/Water
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
4
Separator Filters" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential
further information.
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
· Loose Fuel Filler Cap
the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the system. OBTAIN SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an au-
fuel filler cap may be loose.
thorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies."
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Engine Temperature Warning Light
· Door Ajar
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light illuminates while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for more information.
This light will illuminate to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar.
· Oil Pressure Warning Light
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light illuminates while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light illuminates.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
· Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
· Electric Power Steering Malfunction Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
This telltale is on when the Electric Power
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
Steering is not operating and needs service.
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
· Air Bag Warning Light
4
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
This light will illuminate for four to eight
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or illuminates while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Oc-
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your cupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho- Your Vehicle" for further information.
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle
may require towing.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Oil Temperature Warning Light
Speedometer
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light illuminates while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
· Liftgate Open Warning Light
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Speedometer Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. Push the OK button to change the speedometer scale from mph to km/h (or vice versa).
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
This telltale is on when the liftgate is open.
EVIC Selectable Menu Items Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the EVIC.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT/LEFT arrow button to cycle through the Vehicle Info sub-menus, and follow the prompts on each screen as needed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
· Tire Pressure
· Refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)"
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until "Tire Pressure" is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and
under "Starting and Operating" for further information.
release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following · Coolant Temp
will be displayed:
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
· Transmission Temp
4
ICON.
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
If one or more tires have low pressure, "Inflate Tire To · Oil Temp XX" is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the Displays the actual oil temperature.
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different · Oil Life color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, "Service Tire Displays the remaining oil life.
Pressure System" is displayed.
· Battery Voltage
· Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be Displays the actual battery voltage. reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu.
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Driver Assist
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the EVIC:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off."
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
· Distance Setting Change
· System Cancel
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
· Driver Override
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready."
· System Off · ACC Proximity Warning · ACC Unavailable Warning
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
· The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle."
· Range · Average Fuel Economy · Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km) Trip Info
LaneSense
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until 4
The EVIC displays the current LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to be met. For further information, refer to "LaneSense -- If Equipped"
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information will display the following:
· Distance
in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle."
· Average Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted. Push and hold the OK button to reset feature.
· Elapsed Time Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop/Start If Equipped
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Stop/Start menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the Stop/Start status.
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus and follow the prompts on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
· Compass · Outside Temp (default setting) · Time · Range To Empty (RTE) · Average MPG or L/100 km
· Current MPG or L/100 km · None Upper Right · Compass (default setting) · Outside Temp · Time · Range To Empty (RTE) · Average MPG or L/100 km · Current MPG or L/100 km · None Center · Menu Title (Default Setting) · Compass
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
· Outside Temp
· Time
· Range To Empty
· Average MPG or L/100 km
· Current MPG or L/100 km
4
· Trip A Distance
· Trip B Distance
· Audio Information
· Digital Speed
· None
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings, Outside Temp UL, Compass UR, Center Menu Title) · OK · Cancel
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driverinteractive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Driver Information Display (DID) Location The DID Menu items consist of the following: · Speedometer · Vehicle Info · Driver Assist
· Fuel Economy · Trip · Audio · Messages · Screen Setup · Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) -- If Equipped · Speed Warning -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
4
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
DID Control Buttons
wheel:
· UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll upward through the main menu and submenus.
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu and submenus.
· RIGHT Arrow Button
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
DID Display
The DID displays are located in the center portion of the cluster and consists of eight sections:
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
· BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
· OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push 1. LaneSense -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
2. DID Selectable Display Area
14. Red Reconfigurable Telltale Display
3. Electronic Park Brake Failure
Oil Change Reset
4. Brake Warning Light
Oil Change Due
5. Driver Information Display (DID) Messages
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
6. Manual Speed Assist (MSA) Speed Warning Telltale --
indicator system. The "Oil Change Due" message will display in the DID for five seconds after a single chime
4
If Equipped
has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change
7. Speed For Electronic Speed Control Setting
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty
8. DID Selectable Display Area
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
9. Reconfigurable Telltale Area
style.
10. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL) 11. Instructional Area 12. Yellow Reconfigurable Telltale Display 13. Odometer Display/Fuel Gauge/Temperature
Gauge/Submenu Area
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
DID Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These telltales include:
· Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. OBTAIN SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies."
· Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate, and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, · Oil Pressure Warning Light
a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, when this light turns on.
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
Do In Emergencies" for more information.
· Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
· Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar.
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
· Electric Power Steering Malfunction Warning Light
This telltale is on when the Electric Power Steering is not operating and needs service.
· Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
· Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
· Liftgate Open Warning Light
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
· Service Adaptive Cruise Control Telltale
This telltale is on when the liftgate is open.
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further infor-
mation, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control
DID Yellow Telltales
(ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of
This area will show reconfigurable yellow caution tell- Your Vehicle."
4
tales. These telltales include:
· Low Fuel Telltale
· Forward Collision Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
This telltale will turn on warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
(11.0 L), this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
· Transmission Over Temperature Telltale -- If
· Service Stop/Start System Telltale -- If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/ Start system is not functioning properly and service is required.
Equipped
This telltale indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
· Service 4WD Telltale
· LaneSense Failure Telltale
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the LaneSense Departure has detected a failure.
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
· Diesel Wait To Start Telltale -- If Equipped
The "Wait To Start" telltale will illuminate for approximately two seconds when the ignition is turned to the RUN position. It's duration may be longer based on colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is out. Refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
· Diesel Low Diesel Exhaust Telltale -- If Equipped This telltale will turn on to indicate the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is low.
· Rear Axle Locker Telltale This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been activated.
· Washer Fluid Telltale This telltale will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
· Diesel Water In Fuel Telltale -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
DID Selectable Menu Items
The "Water In Fuel Indicator Light" will illu- Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
minate when there is water detected in the fuel the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID.
filters. If this light remains on, DO NOT start Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired. the vehicle before you drain the water from the
fuel filters to prevent engine damage. Refer to "Mainte- Speedometer
4
nance Procedures/Draining Fuel/Water Separator Fil- Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
ters" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further the Speedometer Menu item is highlighted in the DID.
information.
Push and release the OK button to change the speedom-
· Loose Fuel Filler Cap
eter scale from mph to km/h (or vice versa).
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the fuel filler cap may be loose.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info Menu item is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT/LEFT arrow button to cycle through the Vehicle Info sub-menus and follow the prompts on each screen as needed.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Tire Pressure
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until "Tire Pressure" is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following will be displayed:
· If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON.
· If one or more tires have low pressure, "Inflate Tire To XX" is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other tire pressure value.
· If the Tire Pressure system requires service, "Service Tire Pressure System" is displayed.
· Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu.
· Refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" under "Starting and Operating" for further information.
2. Coolant Temperature Displays the actual coolant temperature.
3. Transmission Temp Displays the actual transmission temperature.
4. Oil Temp Displays the actual oil temperature.
5. Oil Life Displays the remaining oil life.
6. Battery Voltage Displays the actual battery voltage
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Driver Assist
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
the steering wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The information displayed depends on ACC system status. ACC SET
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.
4
the following displays in the DID:
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adap- · Distance Setting Change
tive Cruise Control Off."
· System Cancel
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
· Driver Override
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready."
· System Off · ACC Proximity Warning · ACC Unavailable Warning
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· The DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle."
· Range · Average Fuel Economy · Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km) Trip Info
LaneSense
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to be met. For further information, refer to "LaneSense -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle."
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID. Push and Hold the OK button to reset feature.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information will display the following:
· Distance
· Average Fuel Economy
· Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Stop/Start If Equipped
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Stop/Start icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button to display the Stop/Start release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The Screen
status.
Setup feature allows you to change what information is
Audio
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location 4 that information is displayed.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio Menu displays in the DID.
DIESEL MESSAGES
Stored Messages
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
This engine meets all required diesel engine emissions standards. To achieve these emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine combus-
tion to allow the exhaust system's catalyst to trap and
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
burn Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to additional maintenance required on your vehicle or engine. Refer to the following messages that may be displayed on your Driver Information Display (DID):
· Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway Speeds to Remedy -- This message will be displayed on the Driver Information Display (DID) if the exhaust
particulate filter reaches 80% of its maximum storage capacity. Under conditions of exclusive short duration and low speed driving cycles, your diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment system may never reach the conditions required to cleanse the filter to remove the trapped PM. If this occurs, the "Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway Speeds to Remedy" message will be displayed in the DID. If this message is displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting you of this condition. By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds for up to 20 minutes, you can remedy the condition in the particulate filter system and allow your diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment system to cleanse the filter to remove the trapped PM and restore the system to normal operating condition.
· Exhaust System -- Regeneration In Process Exhaust Filter XX% Full -- This message indicates that the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is self-cleaning. Main- · Exhaust Filter Full -- Power Reduced See Dealer --
tain your current driving condition until regeneration This message indicates the PCM has derated the
is completed.
engine to limit the likelihood of permanent damage to
· Exhaust System -- Regeneration Completed -- This message indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) self-cleaning is completed. If this message is displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting you of this condition.
the after-treatment system. If this condition is not corrected and a dealer service is not performed, extensive exhaust after-treatment damage can occur. To correct this condition it will be necessary to have your 4 vehicle serviced by your local authorized dealer.
· Exhaust Service Required -- See Dealer Now -- This messages indicates regeneration has been disabled due to a system malfunction. At this point the engine Powertrain Control Module (PCM) will register a fault code, the instrument panel will display a MIL light.
NOTE: Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing your oil and resetting the oil change indicator by 0 miles remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust filter from performing it's cleaning routine. This will shortly result in a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and reduced engine power. Only an authorized dealer will be
CAUTION!
able to correct this condition.
See your authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust system could occur soon with continued operation.
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
See your authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust system could occur soon with continued operation.
Diesel Telltales This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:
Water In Fuel Indicator Light
The "Water In Fuel Indicator Light" will illuminate when there is water detected in the fuel filters. If this light remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain the water from the fuel filters to prevent engine damage. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures/Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filters" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
Wait To Start Light
The "Wait To Start" telltale will illuminate for approximately two seconds when the ignition is turned to the RUN position. It's duration may be longer based on colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is out. Refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
NOTE: The "Wait To Start" telltale may not illuminate if the intake manifold temperature is warm enough.
AdBlue® Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the AdBlue® is low.
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
4
Uconnect® 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 -- Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 -- Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 -- Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 -- Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
Your Uconnect® system may also have Screen Off and Back buttons located below the Uconnect® system.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect® touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to turn the touchscreen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect® system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Buttons On The Touchscreen
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
Uconnect® display.
the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
menu or press the "X" button on the touchscreen to close
Settings -- Uconnect® 5.0 Settings
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down
Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate or push the Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow 4
+ MORE button, then the "Settings" button on the you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety & Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options,
Display
After pressing the "Display" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available. · Display Mode
Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, Sirius When in this display you may select the "Auto" or
Setup, Restore Settings, and Clear Personal Data.
"Manual" display settings. To change Mode status, press
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time. and release the "Auto" or "Manual" button on the
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
· Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the overall screen brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights ON setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions.
· Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the overall screen brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights OFF setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions.
· Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the "Set Language"
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
button on the touchscreen, then select the desired lan- · Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster -- If Equipped
guage button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Units
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press the "Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
When in this display, you may select to have the DID, Cluster" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark 4 odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been between US and Metric units of measure. Press "US" or selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen "Metric" to make your selection. Press the back arrow to return to the previous menu. button on the touchscreen to return to the previous · Control Screen Time-Out -- If Equipped
menu. · Touchscreen Beep
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is pressed. Press the "Touchscreen Beep" button on the touchscreen then select from "on" or "off." Press the back
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
touchscreen and select from "Always," "With Help" or "Never." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Voice
Clock & Date
After pressing the "Voice" button on the touchscreen the After pressing the "Clock & Date" button on the touch-
following settings will be available:
screen the following settings will be available:
· Voice Response Length
· Set Time
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, press the "Voice Response Length" button on the touchscreen and select from "Brief" or "Detailed." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Show Command List
When in this display, you may set the time and format manually. Press the "Set Time" button then choose from a "12 hour" or "24 hour format." Press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select "AM" or "PM." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Set Date
When in this display, you may change the Show Com- When in this display, you may set the date manually. mand List settings. To change the Show Command List Press the "Set Date" button then press the corresponding settings, press the "Show Command List" button on the
arrows above and below the current date to adjust. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press and release the "Near" or "Far" button. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
Safety & Driving Assistance
For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Con-
After pressing the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button trol (ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- Vehicle".
4
able:
· Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking --
· Forward Collision Warning (FCW) -- If Equipped
If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision. The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For further information, refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
· LaneSense Warning -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to provide either an "early," "medium," or "late" warning zone start point.
For further information, refer to "LaneSense Warning (LDW)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
· LaneSense Strength -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures. The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane departure can be set at "Low," "Medium" or "High."
For further information, refer to "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
· ParkSense® -- If Equipped
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status, press and release the "Sound" or "Sound and Display" button. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
Refer to "ParkSense® Rear Park Assist" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for system function and operating information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
· Front ParkSense® Volume -- If Equipped
Refer to "ParkSense® Rear Park Assist" in "Understand-
Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect® System (if equipped).
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle" for system function and operating information.
The chime volume settings include "LOW," "MEDIUM," · Tilt Mirrors In Reverse -- If Equipped
and "HIGH." The factory default volume setting is When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
MEDIUM.
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the 4
· Rear ParkSense® Volume -- If Equipped
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The chime volume settings include "LOW," "MEDIUM," and "HIGH." The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
· Rear ParkSense® Braking Assist -- If Equipped
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, press the "Tilt Mirrors In Reverse" button on the touchscreen, and select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Blind Spot Alert -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When
this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the "Off," "Lights" or "Lights & Chime" button on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
· ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guide Lines -- If Equipped
When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
· ParkView® Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines -- If Equipped
When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
· ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
For further information, refer to "Electric Parking Brake
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView® (EPD)" in "Starting and Operating."
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for Lights
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
After pressing the "Lights" button on the touchscreen the
· Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
following settings will be available.
When this feature is selected, the system will automati- · Headlights Off Delay
4
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press the "Rain Sensing" button on the touchscreen, and select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, press the "Headlight Off Delay" button on the touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
· Electric Park Brake Service Mode
seconds. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu. This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sys- · Headlight Illumination On Approach
tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
rotors, etc.).
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, press the "Illuminated Approach" button and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Headlights With Wipers -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press the "Lights w/Wipers" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Auto High Beams -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the "Auto High Beams" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Refer to "Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
· Daytime Running Lights -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make your selection, press the "Daytime Running Lights" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
· Flash Lights w/Lock
Locks" button on the touchscreen and select from "On"
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry · Auto Unlock On Exit
Feature. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
w/Lock" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the 4
or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is
to return to the previous menu.
opened. To make your selection, press the "Auto Unlock
Doors & Locks
On Exit" button on the touchscreen and select from "On"
After pressing the "Doors & Locks" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Auto Door Locks
or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Flash Lights w/Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press the "Auto Door
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry Feature. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
w/Lock" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Horn w/Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your selection, press the "Sound Horn With Lock" button on the touchscreen and select from "Off," "1st Press," or "2nd Press." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Horn w/Remote Start -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the "Horn w/Remote Start" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Remote Door Unlock
When "Remote Door Unlock" is selected, you may choose from "Driver" or "All." Select "All" to have all doors unlock with the first push of the Key Fob. Select "Driver" to have the only the driver door open with the first push of the key fob.
NOTE: Passive Entry -- If Equipped. If "All" is selected, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry door handle is grasped. If "Driver" is selected, only the driver's door will unlock when the driver's door is grasped.
· Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the "Passive Entry" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off. Press the back
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous · Power Lift Gate Alert -- If Equipped
menu. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
· Memory Linked to Fob -- If Equipped
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the "Power Lift Gate Alert" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
4
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the Auto Comfort Systems -- If Equipped
vehicle. To make your selection, press the "Memory Linked to Fob" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location if "Memory Linked to Fob" is set to (ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
After pressing the "Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn ON. To make your selection, press the "Auto Heated
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seats" button on the touchscreen, then select either "Off," "Remote Start" or "All Starts." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the "Engine Off Options" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available. · Easy Exit Seats -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Driver's seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off. To make your selection, press the "Easy Exit Seats" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Engine Off Power Delay
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off Power Delay status press the "0 seconds," "45 seconds," "5 minutes" or "10 minutes" button on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
· Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the "+" or "" button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
Compass Settings -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
After pressing the "Compass Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
4
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
Compass Variance Map
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
· Perform Compass Calibration
Press the "Calibration" button on the touchscreen to change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
by pressing the "ON" button on the touchscreen and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the "Audio" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
arrows to adjust, tap the "C" icon to readjust to the center. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the "Speed Adjusted Volume" button on the touchscreen and select from "Off," "1," "2" or "3" buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Surround Sound -- If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the "Surround Sound" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· AUX Volume Offset -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
· Paired Phones
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level This feature shows which phones are paired to the
for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
To make your selection, press the "AUX Volume Offset" to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the · Paired Audio Sources
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to
4
the previous menu.
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
· Loudness -- If Equipped
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes. To make your selection, press the "Loudness" button on
SiriusXM Setup -- If Equipped
the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back After pressing the "SiriusXM Setup" button on the touch-
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the screen, the following settings will be available:
previous menu.
· Channel Skip
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the "Phone/Bluetooth®" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the "Channel Skip" button on the
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
· Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the "Subscription Info" button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
Restore Settings
After pressing the "Restore Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?" select "Yes" to restore, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating settings reset to default. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to exit.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Clear Personal Data
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
After pressing the "Clear Personal Data Settings" button Settings -- Uconnect® 8.4 Personal Settings
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- Press the "Apps" or the "Controls" button on the touch-
able:
screen, then press the "Settings" button on the touch-
· Clear Personal Data
screen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display,
4
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors
personal information, press the "Clear Personal Data" & Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio,
button and a pop-up will appear asking Are you sure Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings,
you want to clear all personal data?" select "Yes" to Clear, Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
or "Cancel" to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop
up appears stating Personal data cleared". Press the back NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
menu.
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
Display
After pressing the "Display" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available. · Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings. To change Mode status, select from "Day," "Night" or "Auto" until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
· Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights ON setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions.
· Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
· Set Language
When in this display, you may select the brightness with When in this display, you may select one of multiple
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
"" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi-
point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the gation system (if equipped). Press the "Set Language"
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the button on the touchscreen, then select the desired lan- 4
touchscreen.
guage button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights OFF setting, the headlights must be off and
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or · Units
parade positions. · Set Theme
When in this display, you may select to have the DID, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
This feature will allow you to choose a background theme for the display screen. The theme will change the background color, highlight color, and button color of the display screen.
between US and Metric units of measure. Press "US" or "Metric" until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when button on the touchscreen is pressed. Press the "Touchscreen Beep" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, To make your selection, press the "Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Controls Screen Time-Out
Voice
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the ability for the controls screen to time out. Press the "Controls Screen Time-Out" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the "Voice" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, press the "Brief" or "Detailed" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the time with GPS" button on the touchscreen until a check-
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has
previous menu.
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
· Show Command List
screen to return to the previous menu. · Set Time Hours
When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The "Sync 4
options while in a voice session. To change the Show time with GPS" button on the touchscreen must be
Command List settings, press the "Always," "With unchecked. To make your selection, press the "+" or ""
Help," or "Never" button on the touchscreen until a buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on return to the previous menu.
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Set Time Minutes
Clock
After pressing the "Clock" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The "Sync time with GPS" button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the "+" or "" buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to signal. To change the Sync Time setting, press the "Sync return to the previous menu.
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Time Format
Safety & Driving Assistance
This feature will allow you to select the time format display setting. Press the "Time Format" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the "12hrs" or "24hrs" setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Show Time In Status Bar -- If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time Status setting press the "Show Time in Status Bar" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Forward Collision Warning (FCW) -- If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press and release the "Near" or "Far" button. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Con- · LaneSense Warning -- If Equipped
trol (ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
· Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking -- lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
If Equipped
provide either an "early," "medium," or "late" warning
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). zone start point.
4
When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to For further information, refer to "LaneSense Warning
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision. (LDW)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the hicle".
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes
· LaneSense Strength -- If Equipped
active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
For further information, refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures. The amount of directional torque the steering system can apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane departure can be set at "Low," "Medium" or "High."
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For further information, refer to "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
· ParkSense® -- If Equipped
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status, press and release the "Sound" or "Sound and Display" button. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
Refer to "ParkSense® Rear Park Assist" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for system function and operating information.
· Front ParkSense® Volume -- If Equipped
Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The chime volume settings include "LOW," "MEDIUM," and "HIGH." The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
· Rear ParkSense® Volume -- If Equipped
Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The chime volume settings include "LOW," "MEDIUM," and "HIGH." The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
· Rear ParkSense® Braking Assist -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Refer to "ParkSense® Rear Park Assist" in "Understand- this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle" for system function system is activated and will only show a visual alert in
and operating information.
the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is
· Tilt Mirrors In Reverse -- If Equipped
activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To 4
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the "Off,"
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their "Lights" or "Lights & Chime" button on the touchscreen.
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the "Tilt Mirrors In Reverse" button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Blind Spot Alert -- If Equipped
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guide Lines -- If Equipped
When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
· ParkView® Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines -- If Equipped
When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
· ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView® Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
· Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press the "Rain Sensing" button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Electric Park Brake Service Mode
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
For further information, refer to "Electric Parking Brake (EPD)" in "Starting and Operating."
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
Lights
press the "+" or "" button on the touchscreen to select
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Headlight Off Delay
your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Headlights With Wipers -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
4
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
press the "+" or "" button on the touchscreen to select proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button
back button on the faceplate.
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
· Headlight Illumination On Approach
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Auto Dim High Beams -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the "Auto High Beams" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to "Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
· Daytime Running Lights -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your selection, press the "Daytime Running Lights" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights with Lock" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
· Auto Door Locks
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the "Auto Door · Flash Lights With Lock
Locks" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote 4
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
on the faceplate.
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
· Auto Unlock On Exit
make your selection, press the "Flash Lights with Lock"
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press the "Auto Unlock on Exit" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Sound Horn With Lock
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press either the "Off," "1st Press," or "2nd Press" button
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the "Sound Horn with Remote Start" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When Driver Door is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger's doors.
When All Doors is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "All Doors," all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock when the driver's door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is programmed, touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver's door opening. If "Driver Door" is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/ unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
· Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
your selection, press the "Passive Entry" button on the menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle".
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
4
· Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob -- If Equipped · Power Lift Gate Chime -- If Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver's seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the "Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the "Power Lift Gate Chime" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Auto-On Comfort -- If Equipped
Engine Off Options
After pressing the "Auto-On Comfort" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver's heated seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection, press the "Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start" button on the touchscreen, then select either "Off," "Remote Start" or "All Starts" until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow/ Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Easy Exit Seat -- If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the "Easy Exit Seat" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the · Balance/Fade
Engine Off Power Delay status press the "+" or "-" button to choose from "0 seconds," "45 seconds," "5 minutes," or "10 minutes." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows to adjust, or tap the `C' icon to readjust to the center. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
· Headlight Off Delay
previous menu.
4
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the "+" or "-" button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Audio
After pressing the "Audio" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the "Off," "1," "2" or "3" button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Surround Sound -- If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the "Surround Sound" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· AUX Volume Offset -- If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from 3 to +3. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Loudness -- If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To make your selection, press the "Loudness" button on the touchscreen, then choose "Yes" or "No." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the "Phone/Bluetooth®" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
· Paired Audio Sources
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
· Subscription Information
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
SiriusXM Setup -- If Equipped
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
4
After pressing the "SiriusXM Setup" button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Press the "Subscription Info" button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
· Channel Skip
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to the screen or visit the provider online.
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the "Channel Skip" button on the NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip and is available for U.S. residents only.
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restore Settings
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the "Restore Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the "Restore Settings" button on the touchscreen and pop-up will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?" select "OK" to restore, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears stating settings reset to default.
After pressing the "Clear Personal Data Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the "Clear Personal Data" button and a pop-up will appear asking Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?" select "OK" to Clear, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating Personal data cleared."
System Information
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED
After pressing the "System Information" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Information screen will appear displaying the system software
4
version.
Uconnect® RADIOS -- IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio, refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
1 -- USB Port 2 -- SD Card Slot 3 -- AUX Port
Media Hub
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Located in the front storage area, this feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please visit Apple's website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® User's Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS -- IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch CD Player
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/ Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
CD/AUX, etc.).
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
control is different depending on which mode you are in. seconds after the current track begins to play.
4
The following describes the left-hand control operation in If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
each mode.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will "Seek" up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will "Seek" down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the center button will select the next available CD in the player.
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily "clear" by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
Regulatory And Safety Information
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
USA/CANADA
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
4
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
body.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie
community.
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de li-
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
cence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
· This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
· If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
· Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
· Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather. This system can be operated through either the controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display.
Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen -- If Equipped
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can Front Blower Control be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
There are several blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed 4 increases as you move the control clockwise from the OFF position.
Temperature Control
Manual Climate Controls
1 -- RECIRCULATION Control 5 -- Air Conditioning (A/C)
2 -- Front Blower Control
6 -- REAR DEFROST Mode
3 -- MAX Air Conditioning
7 -- MODE Control
(A/C)
4 -- Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning Operation
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the A/C is turned on automatically and the air is recirculated.
NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C button is pushed. If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary mode, as identified by the symbols, or a blend of two of these modes. The closer the control is to a particular mode, the more air distribution you receive from that mode.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Bi-Level Mode Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any Defrost Mode
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
Air is directed through the windshield and side 4
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
Floor Mode
for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets.
and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Mix Mode
Recirculation Control
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side Push this button to choose between outside air intake or window demist outlets. This setting works best in recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
NOTE:
· If the RECIRCULATION button is pushed when the system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will flash three times and then turn off to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
· Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
· In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum defogging, select the outside air position.
· The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection by pushing the A/C button.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Windshield Wiper De-icer -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
· Activation By Remote Start Operation
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element lo- When the Remote Start is activated and the outside
cated at the base of the windshield.
ambient temperature is less than 33° F (0.6° C) the
The windshield wiper de-icer operates automatically windshield wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Re-
once the following conditions are met:
mote Start, the climate control functions will resume their
· Activation By Front Defrost
previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the 4 de-icer timer and operation will continue.
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold weather manual start with full defrost, and when the ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
· Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
Stop/Start System -- If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen -- If Equipped
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Faceplate
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Touchscreen
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® screen.
Uconnect® Manual Climate Controls -- Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect® 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls -- Buttons On The Touchscreen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this 4
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Uconnect® 8.4 Manual Temperature Controls -- Buttons On The Touchscreen
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when ON.
4. Front Defrost Button
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Push and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional push of this button, five additional minutes will be added to the timer function.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: · Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. · Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. · Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
6. Blower Control
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
forced through the climate system. There are seven and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The area between the icons.
speeds can be selected using either the blower control 7. Modes
4
knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as
follows:
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
· Panel Mode
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
control knob counterclockwise.
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
· Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. · Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
8. Climate Control OFF Button
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
9. Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
Provides temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
10. Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4) Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
Provides temperature control. Push the button on the Touchscreen -- If Equipped
faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the Buttons On Your Uconnect® Faceplate
touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touch- The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
screen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on Uconnect® screen.
the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
4
11. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0)
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures.
Uconnect® Automatic Climate Controls -- Buttons On Your Faceplate
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Touchscreen
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls -- Buttons On Your Touchscreen
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls -- Buttons On Your Touchscreen
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to 5. Front Defrost Button
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
2. A/C Button
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
Press and release to change the current setting, the window demist outlets. When the defrost button is indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode 4 function again will cause the A/C operation to switch with maximum temperature settings for best windshield into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
3. Recirculation Button
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
Press and release to change the current setting, the system will return to the previous setting.
indicator illuminates when ON.
6. Rear Defrost Button
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to "Automatic Operation" for more information.
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional press of
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
this button, five additional minutes will be added to the 7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
timer function.
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: · Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. · Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. · Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar speeds can be selected using either the blower control
towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as
cooler temperature settings.
follows:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
automatically exit Sync.
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
9. SYNC
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. 4
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem- Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
10. Blower Control
area between the icons.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Panel Mode
· Floor Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
· Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. · Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the 15. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0 Only)
blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-
time. 14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera- 4 tures.
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Climate Control Functions
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
· If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
· If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Press to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pushing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and cause MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button. The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may The windshield wiper de-icer operates automatically
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation once the following conditions are met:
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen · Activation By Front Defrost
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed weather manual start with full defrost, and when the
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
4
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Windshield Wiper De-icer -- If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element located at the base of the windshield.
· Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C). · Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the outside ambient temperature is less than 33° F (0.6° C) the
windshield wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Re-
mote Start, the climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the
de-icer timer and operation will continue.
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
NOTE:
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the "AUTO" button on the touchscreen.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the temperature. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.
· It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
· The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the Uconnect® customerprogrammable feature. Refer to the "Uconnect® System Settings" in this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
Manual Operation Override
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- temperature control will continue to operate automati-
trol.
cally.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by Operating Tips adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for 4
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This suggested control settings for various weather condi-
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air tions.
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation.
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Summer Operation
Vacation Storage
The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
NOTE:
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
· Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long periods, as fogging may occur.
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
· Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
A/C Air Filter
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. The climate control system filters outside air containing 4
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable. dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
Outside Air Intake
totally filtered out. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for filter replacement instruc-
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the tions.
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Key Features:
Introducing Uconnect®
· 5" touchscreen
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these · Three buttons on either side of the display
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0
or 8.4A/8.4AN system.
4
Uconnect® 5.0
Uconnect® 8.4AN
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a Uconnect® 8.4A system.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
Uconnect® Voice Command
1 -- Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text 2 -- For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For 8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions 3 -- Push To End Call
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say
· Cancel to stop a current voice session
4
· Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
· Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system's status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 5.0
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio® trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say
· Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
· Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say "Help." The system will provide you with a list of commands.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
4 Uconnect® 5.0 Radio
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.
· Change source to Bluetooth®
· Change source to iPod®
· Change source to USB
· Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Media
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth® and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect® 5.0 Media
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439
4 Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media
440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say "Call," then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say "Call John Smith work."
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands
· Call John Smith
· Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
· Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
· Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect® 5.0 Phone
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button . After the beep, say: "Reply."
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.
4 PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without me.
I'll be Late.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone Voice Text Reply
Okay. Call me.
Where are you?
Are you there yet?
I will be <number> minutes late.
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button and say Listen. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
I'll call you later.
I'm on my way. I'm lost.
I need directions.
Can't talk right now.
See you in <number> of
minutes.
Thanks.
442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
· Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
· Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is
optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer
to activate navigation at any time.)
4
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button the beep, say:
. After
· For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: "Enter state."
· For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: "Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan."
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN)
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button After the beep, say: " Find nearest coffee shop."
. An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,
444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page.
*Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States and Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp® Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
Wi-Fi Hotspot*** **If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch touchscreen.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Registration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and confirm your personal email address. Then press Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from Uconnect® Access.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
complete the easy online registration process to create Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the
a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the
your vehicle.
App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually
any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with
factory-installed Remote Start.)
4
Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN
Mobile App
446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do is:
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect® to process your message.
1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to your Mopar® Owner Connect account at moparownerconnect.com.
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone number to receive a link to download the App on your mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and search for the Uconnect® Access App.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is then connected to your mobile device.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After the beep, say the following command: "Send message to John Smith."
3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect® what you'd like to do. For instance, if you're happy with your message, after the beep, say: "Send."
You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have a compatible MAP enabled smartphone to use your voice to send a personalized text message.
TIP:
· Not compatible with iPhone®.
· Messages are limited to 140 characters.
· The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use your voice to search for the most popular places or things around you.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
1. Press the "Apps" button on the touchscreen. 4
2. Press the "All Apps" button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the "Yelp" button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touch-
screen, push the VR button
, then say: "YELP
search."
5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell Uconnect® the place or business that you'd like Uconnect® to find.
Yelp®
448 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Travel LinkTM (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel LinkTM is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
· Show fuel prices
· Show 5 - day weather forecast
· Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel LinkTM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 449
Additional Information
Uconnect® System Support:
© 2014 Chrysler Group LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar · U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 or visit
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar DriveUconnect.com
Owner Connect is a trademark of Chrysler Group LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all
· Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM 1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
4
Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks Mon. Fri., 7:00 am 12:00 am, ET
are registered trademarks of Yelp.
Sat., 8:00 am 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when you call.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
STARTING PROCEDURES -- GASOLINE ENGINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode. .462 5
Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20°F Or -29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 STOP/START SYSTEM -- 3.2L ENGINE . . . . . . .459 Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .463 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . .463 System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED . . .464 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .467
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .468 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 When To Use 4WD LOW Range . . . . . . . . . . .489
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . .477 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .491 Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) . . . . . . . . .495 Auto Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
SELEC-TERRAINTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Safehold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Brake Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .503 Rain Brake Support (RBS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .503 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .505 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .528
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .507 Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .530 5
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .531
Hill Descent Control (HDC) -- If Equipped . . .510 TIRES -- GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .536
Selec Speed Control (SSC) -- If Equipped . . . .514 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .517 Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .539 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
Run Flat Tires -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Spare Tires -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .566
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .548 Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .551 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .553
Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 Premium System -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .559 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE ONLY) -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .575
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
5
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .576 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .592
VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 Recreational Towing -- Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Recreational Towing -- 4X4 Models With 1-Speed Power Transfer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Recreational Towing -- 4X4 Models With 2-Speed Power Transfer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES -- GASOLINE ENGINES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
· Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
(Continued) Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the Extended Park Starting
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
Tip Start Feature
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it when the engine starts.
5
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this 3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
occurs, cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK position, ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
procedure.
Extended Park Starting procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20°F Or -29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING! · Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
· If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to "Jump Starting" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
With Tip Start
After Starting
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
Normal Starting, "Extreme Cold Weather and Ex- decrease as the engine warms up.
tended Park Starting procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press the accelerator pedal all the STOP/START SYSTEM -- 3.2L ENGINE
way to the floor and hold it. Then, cycle the ignition The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel
switch to the START position and release it as soon as the consumption. The system will stop the engine automati-
starter engages. The starter motor will disengage auto- cally during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are 5
matically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator
accelerator pedal, cycle the ignition to the LOCK posi- pedal will automatically re-start the engine.
tion, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal
Starting" procedure.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
CAUTION!
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE "Autostop" mode.
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
· The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) within the Stop/ Start section. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
· The vehicle must be completely stopped.
· The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/ Start system may be viewed in the EVIC/DID Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations the engine will not stop:
· Driver's seat belt is not buckled.
· Driver's door is not closed.
· Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
· Battery charge is low.
· The vehicle is on a steep grade.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
· Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept- · Fuel level.
able cabin temperature has not been achieved.
· Accelerator pedal input.
· HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
· Engine temp too high.
· HVAC set to MAX A/C. · Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
· 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previous AUTOSTOP.
· Steering angle beyond threshold.
5
· The transmission is not in a forward gear.
· ACC is on and speed is set.
· Hood is open.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
· Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.
times without the STOP/START system going into a
· Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
STOP/START READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
· STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
· A STOP/START system error occurs. · 4WD system is put into 4LO mode.
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric Park Brake While In Autostop Mode: · The drivers door is open and brake pedal released.
· The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE. · To maintain cabin temperature comfort. · HVAC is set to full defrost mode. · HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted. · Battery voltage drops too low. · Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal
applications).
· The drivers door is open and the drivers seat belt is unbuckled.
· The engine hood has been opened.
· A STOP/START system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off, the engine may require a manual restart and the electric park brake may require a manual release (depress brake pedal and press Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or
"Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
2. The "STOP/START OFF" message will appear in Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system) the engine will not be stopped.
5
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
STOP/START OFF Switch
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the system will not shut down the engine. A "SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM" message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
If the "SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM" message appears in the EVIC/DID, have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood, behind to the driver's side headlamp. Follow the steps below to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver's side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the driver's side headlamp.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
NOTE:
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
· The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
WARNING!
are available from your authorized MOPAR® dealer. · It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
· The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
· The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit 5 someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
WARNING!
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
(Continued)
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) · Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. · When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
· Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM) in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
CAUTION!
removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF
ing precautions are not observed:
position.
· Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop. · Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed. · Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
5
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
Key Ignition Park Interlock
stopped or moving at low speeds.
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ OFF (key removal) position. The key fob can only be
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle's overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions. To activate ECO mode press the "Controls" button on the touchscreen and then press the "ECO" button on the touchscreen. When ECO mode is engaged a green light in the center stack of the instrument panel will be illuminated and a green ECO light will also illuminate in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). In 4WD models, ECO mode is only active in '4WD Auto' driving mode. If you switch to another driving mode the ECO button will turn grey and the ECO light in the instrument panel will disappear indicating it is no longer in ECO mode. It will automatically re-enable ECO mode when you switch back into 4WD Auto.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both beside the shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID). To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.
DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS
shift control (refer to Electronic Range Select (ERS)
5
Operation in this section for further information). Mov-
ing the shift lever into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the
DRIVE position) activates ERS mode, displays the cur-
rent gear in the instrument cluster, and prevents auto-
matic upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS mode, toggling
the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the
highest available gear.
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the
Shift Lever
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
WARNING!
· Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. · It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
WARNING! (Continued) · Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) 5 position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. · When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) · Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. · Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM) in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
· Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result.
· DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
The following indicators should be used to ensure that NEUTRAL (N)
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi- Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
tion:
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
· When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
· Look at the transmission gear position display and
WARNING!
5
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
· With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK.
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the
REVERSE (R)
vehicle and have a collision.
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" and "Towing A Disabled Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation in this section for further information) to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller may modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the "Transmission Temperature Warning Light" may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may Transmission Limp Home Mode
be modified depending on engine and transmission Transmission function is monitored electronically for
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im- abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
"Note" under "Torque Converter Clutch" in this section). to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be 5
Normal operation will resume once the transmission illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
SPORT -- IF EQUIPPED
aging the transmission.
This mode alters the transmission's automatic shift In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in- can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
creased to make full use of available engine power.
following steps:
SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch on the center console. Refer to Selec-Terrain in this section for further information.
1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears.
Moving the shift lever to the ERS position (beside DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the shift lever to the DRIVE position.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if you shift the transmission into 5 (fifth gear), the transmission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift through the lower gears normally.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever into the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles
the ERS position, then simply press and hold it forward [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher
(-). The transmission will shift to the range from which when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
the vehicle can best be slowed down.
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
Torque Converter Clutch
cold, this is normal. The torque converter clutch will function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been warm. included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
5
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati- FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) -- If Equipped
This feature provides on-demand four-wheel drive (4X4). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
1-Speed 4X4 Switch
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) -- If Equipped
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
2-Speed 4x4 Switch
5 2-Speed 4x4 Switch (with Rear Lock)
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in the normal driving mode at a given road speed. Take care not to
driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttons provide three overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
selectable mode positions:
(40 km/h).
· 4WD LOW · REAR LOCK (If Equipped) · NEUTRAL
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the driveline components.
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW range position can be used to provide an additional gear reduction which allows for increased torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in 4WD LOW on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each 4WD system mode position, see the information below:
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine NEUTRAL speed is approximately three times that of the normal This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain.
It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting and Operat- while providing maximum pulling power for loose,
ing" for further information.
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
WARNING!
NOTE: Refer to "Selec-Terrain® If Equipped" for fur-
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave ther information on the various positions and their
the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit intended usages.
in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully Shifting Procedures engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N)
5
position disengages both the front and rear drive Shifting Into 4X4 LOW
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the "4WD LOW" button once. The "4WD LOW" indica-
4WD LOW
tor light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete.
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides
an additional gear reduction which allows for increased
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
482 STARTING AND OPERATING Selec-Terrain Switch
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met a message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with instructions on how to complete the requested shift. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ Driver Information Display (DID) in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Shifting Out Of 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the "4WD LOW" button once. The "4WD LOW" indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete.
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
NOTE:
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
· If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
WARNING!
Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
instructions on how to complete the requested shift. the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit
Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully
(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) in "Under- engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) standing Your Instrument Panel" for further informa- position disengages both the front and rear drive 5
tion.
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
· Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop-
to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
erly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the transmission to PARK.
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster 2. Turn the engine OFF.
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD system will not allow the shift.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but do not start the engine.
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
Neutral Switch 7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Activating The Rear E-Locker
To activate the Rear E-Locker System, the following conditions must be met:
12. Apply the parking brake.
1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine 2. The ignition switch in the ON position and the engine
OFF, and remove the key fob.
running.
Repeat steps 1-7 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 MPH (24 km/h).
5
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System -- If Equipped
4. To engage Rear E-Locker, press the REAR LOCK button once.
The Rear E-Locker System features a mechanical locking rear differential to provide better traction in the 4WD LOW position. The "REAR LOCK" button is on the Selec-Terrain Knob.
Deactivating The Rear E-Locker System
To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, the following conditions must be met:
1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and the REAR LOCK indicator light on.
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. The ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running.
3. To disengage Rear E-Locker, press the REAR LOCK button once.
NOTE:
· It may also be necessary to drive slowly steering back and forth to complete engagement and disengagement of the E-Locker.
· When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button will begin to flash. When the shift is complete the REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain on.
· When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button will begin to flash. When the shift is complete the REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain off.
· Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker is possible with the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is for the vehicle to be rolling, below 15 MPH (24 km/h), while including right and left steering maneuvers to allow for the clutch teeth to align.
· The Rear E-Locker System must be disengaged prior to taking the vehicle out of 4WD LOW range. If 4WD LOW shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with instructions on how to complete the requested shift.
SELEC-TERRAINTM
Description
Selec-TerrainTM combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to provide the best performance for all terrains.
Rotate the Selec-TerrainTM knob to select the desired mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
5
Selec-TerrainTM Switch Selec-TerrainTM offers the following modes:
· Auto -- Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive operation can be used on and off road. Balances traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel drive vehicles.
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
· Snow -- Tuning set for additional stability in inclement weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces such as snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the transmission may use second gear (rather than first gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
· Sport -- This mode alters the transmission's automatic shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power.
NOTE: SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW is selected.
· Sand/Mud -- Off road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin.
· Rock -- Off-road calibration only available in 4WD LOW range. Traction based tuning with improved steer-ability for use on high traction off-road surfaces. Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
· Rock mode is only available on the vehicles equipped with the Off-Road package.
· Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed Control for steep downhill control. See "Electronic Brake Control System" in this section for further information.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the EVIC/DID display. Refer to "Electronic
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a low-speed pulling power (refer to "All Wheel Drive and
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
Four-Wheel Drive Operation" in this section for further details). This range should be limited to extreme situa-
5
ordinary cars.
tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. 4WD LOW range.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-
rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water:
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches (51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
Maintenance
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be-
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Trans- control.
fer Unit and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not Hill Climbing
been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants
(milky, foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
as soon as possible to prevent component damage.
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a 5 lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to "FourWheel Drive Operation" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the
tires.
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD System to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent Control if equipped (refer to Electronic Brake Control System in this section for further information). Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction.
NOTE: Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may provide a fresh "bite" into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it.
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
· Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
WARNING!
exhaust system for damage.
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
· Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required.
· Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus- and cleaned as necessary.
5
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
· If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
· Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.
· After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
If the "SERVICE POWER STEERING OR POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM" message and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
If the "POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFORMANCE MAY BE LIMITED" message and an icon are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
NOTE:
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
· Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
during parking maneuvers.
· Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
· If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service.
· Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature in the customer programmable features section of
5
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)
the Uconnect® settings.
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Parking Brake System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some additional features that make the parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake switch is located in the center console.
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
on the brake pedal while you apply the parking brake, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake can be applied even when the ignition switch is OFF but the BRAKE warning lamp will not illuminate, however, it can only be released when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the released or applied position. The light will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
Electric Parking Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking brake engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking brake will automatically engage whenever the transmission is placed into PARK, or with a manual transmission, when the ignition switch is turned OFF. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement while the parking brake is engaging.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
The parking brake will release automatically when the NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
ignition switch is ON, the transmission is in Drive or front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
Reverse, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the
made to drive away.
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch down momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
5
the back of the car while the parking brake disengages. You may also notice a small amount of movement in the
WARNING!
brake pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged, The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
· Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) · Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. · Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. · Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion, maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake switch for as long as engagement is desired. The Brake warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated flashing. In this event, urgent service of the electric park
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
brake system is required. Do not rely on the parking
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a Auto Park Brake
complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle The electric park brake can be programmed to be applied
reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
brake will remain engaged.
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or with a manual transmission, whenever the ignition switch is
5
WARNING!
turned "OFF". Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, by customer selection through the customer programor repeated use of the parking brake to slow the mable features section of the Uconnect® Settings.
vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake system; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
Any single auto park brake application can be bypassed by pressing the EPB switch to the release position while the transmission is placed in PARK.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This may be accompanied by the Brake warning lamp
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Safehold
Safehold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake System that will engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition switch is in RUN.
For automatic transmissions, the park brake will automatically engage if all of the following conditions are met:
· The vehicle is at a standstill.
· There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
· The seat belt is unbuckled.
· The driver door is open.
For manual transmissions, the park brake will automatically engage if all of the following conditions are met:
· The vehicle is at a standstill.
· There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
· The clutch pedal is not pressed.
· The seat belt is unbuckled.
· The driver door is open.
Safehold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open. Once manually bypassed, Safehold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the OFF position and back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake service.
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for When brake service work is complete, the following steps
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
rear caliper bore. With the electric parking brake system, normal operation:
this can only be done after retracting the Electric Parking Brake actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be
· Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
done easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through · Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
the Uconnect® Settings in your vehicle. This menu based system will guide you through the steps necessary to
· Apply the Electric Parking Brake Switch.
5
retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
WARNING!
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order to be activated: · The vehicle must be at a standstill. · The parking brake must be unapplied. · The transmission must be in Park or Neutral.
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
While in service mode, the Electric Parking Brake fault lamp will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the hydraulic system, the "Brake Warning Light" will turn on as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating.
WARNING!
· Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
· Driving a vehicle with the "Brake Warning Light" on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction surfaces.
Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), and type, and tires must be properly inflated, to produce
Electronic Stability Control (ESC). These systems work accurate signals for the computer.
together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in
5
various driving conditions.
WARNING!
Your vehicle is also equipped with Trailer Sway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB) and Rain Brake Support (RBS). Further, all vehicles equipped with a twospeed power transfer unit have Hill Descent Control (HDC) and some vehicles may also be equipped with Selec Speed Control (SSC).
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
Significant over or underinflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow. This is normal.
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph (20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal.
WARNING!
· Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
· The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
WARNING! (Continued) · The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. · The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
CAUTION!
The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sen- · Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
· Do not "ride" the brakes by resting your foot on the pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking ability, and control.
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis- · After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes
tances, or brake damage.
may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
· When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by 5 gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds.
transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos- Traction Control System (TCS)
sible.
· Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up, which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuvering, parking, or stopping.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the "Partial Off" mode or the "Full Off" mode. Refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in this section for further information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
"pump" the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
WARNING!
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver's steering wheel input and the Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condispeed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's speed that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The 5 occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to of others.
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the road- Hill Start Assist (HSA) way, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in "Full Off" mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short
period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate:
· The vehicle must be stopped.
· The vehicle must be on a 7% (approximate) grade or greater hill.
· The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
· For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Towing With HSA
WARNING! (Continued)
HSA will provide assistance during acceleration on an · HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
incline while towing a trailer.
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
WARNING!
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. · Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
· If you use a trailer brake controller with your
collision or serious personal injury.
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
Disabling And Enabling HSA
5
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake using the Uconnect® Access Settings. Refer to
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an "Uconnect® Access Settings" in "Understanding Your
incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac- Instrument Panel" for further information.
tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Descent Control (HDC) -- If Equipped
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
Hill Descent Control
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
· Driveline is in 4WD Low Range · Vehicle speed is below 5mph (8 km/h) · Parking brake is released · Driver door is closed
Activating HDC
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
· 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if · 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is
· 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the · 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
gear shift lever. The following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
· 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
· P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not · 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h)
5
activate
NOTE:
· R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) · N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) · D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) · 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) · 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) · 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
· During HDC the ERS +/- shifter input is used for HDC target speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. During HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
· HDC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driver Override:
Disabling HDC
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
brake application at anytime.
following conditions occur:
Deactivating HDC
· The driver presses the HDC switch.
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:
· Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake application.
· Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
· Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
· The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
· The parking brake is applied.
· Driver door opens.
· The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
· The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately.)
· Vehicle is shifted to park.
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Feedback to the driver:
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
The Hill Descent Switch is located within the SelecTerrain knob in the upper right position.
This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
WARNING!
5
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control-
HDC switch when the enable conditions have not been ling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
met.
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC deactivates due to
excess speed.
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selec Speed Control (SSC) -- If Equipped
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pressing the SSC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
Selec Speed Control Switch
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling engine torque and brakes.
· Driveline is in 4WD Low Range · Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h) · Parking brake is released · Driver door is closed
· Driver is not applying throttle
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
Activating SSC
4WD Low Range Set Speeds
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once · 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
the following conditions are met:
· 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
· Driver releases throttle
· 3rd = 4 mph (3 km/h)
· Driver releases brake
· 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
· Transmission is in any selection other than P
· 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
5
· Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
· 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear shift lever. Additionally, the
· 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
SSC set speed is automatically reduced when climbing a · 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
grade and the level of set speed reduction depends on the magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC
· 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h)
set speeds:
· REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
· NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
· PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Deactivating SSC
· These SSC default set speeds are dependent on hill grade. That is the steeper the grade of the hill the vehicle travels on the lower the values of the set speed will be for all listed gears, with the minimal value being .6 mph (1 km/h).
· During SSC the ERS +/- shifter input is used for SSC target speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. During SSC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
· SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or brake application at any time.
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur: · Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
application. · Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h). · Vehicle is shifted to park.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following conditions occur: · The driver presses the SSC switch. · The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range. · The parking brake is applied. · Driver door opens.
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
· The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) · The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then
for greater than 70 seconds.
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated
· The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) brakes.
(SSC exits immediately).
WARNING!
Feedback To The Driver:
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in control-
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC ling vehicle speed when driving in off road condi-
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver tions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving 5
about the state SSC is in.
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and vehicle speed.
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for SSC.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
seconds then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
excess speed.
maintain the desired path.
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
· Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
· Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" also flashes when the TCS is active. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
ESC Operating Modes
Partial Off -- Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range
system has up to three operating modes: "ESC On" The "Partial Off" mode is intended for driving in deep
"Partial Off," and "Full Off."
snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the threshold for
ESC On -- Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-Wheel TCS and ESC activation, which allows for more wheel
Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range
spin than what ESC normally allows.
This is the normal operating mode for ESC when oper- The "ESC Off" button is located in the lower switch bank 5
ating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also the normal above the climate control. To enter the "Partial Off"
mode for operating a four-wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or 4WD HIGH range. The ESC system will be in "ESC On" mode whenever the vehicle is started or the power transfer unit (if equipped) is shifted out of 4WD LOW
mode, momentarily press the "ESC Off" button and the ESC Off indicator light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily press the ESC OFF button and the ESC Off indicator light will turn off. This will restore
range. This mode should be used for most driving the normal "ESC On" mode of operation.
situations. ESC should only be turned to "Partial Off" or
"Full Off" for specific reasons as noted. Refer to "Partial
Off" and to "Full Off" for additional information.
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
· When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will be illuminated. When in "Partial Off" mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
· Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial Off" mode by momentarily pressing the "ESC Off" button. Once the situation requiring "Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the "ESC Off" button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
Full Off -- Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD High And 4WD Low Range
The "Full Off" mode is intended for off-highway and off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions.
The "ESC Off" button is located in the lower switch bank above the climate control panel. To enter "Full Off" mode, press and hold the "ESC Off" button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, the ESC Off indicator light will illuminate and an "ESC Off" message will appear in the odometer.
In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off (except for the "limited slip" feature described in the TCS section) until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
speeds over 40 mph (64 km/h), the system automatically NOTE:
switches to "Partial Off" mode, described above. When the vehicle speed returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system will return to "Full Off" mode. The ESC OFF indicator light is always illuminated when ESC is off. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the "ESC Off" button. This will restore the normal "ESC On" mode
· "Full Off" is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW range. The ESC system will be in this mode whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or the power transfer unit is shifted into 4WD LOW range.
of operation.
· The "ESC OFF" message will display and a chime will 5 sound when the shift lever is moved from any position
WARNING!
to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK
With the ESC switched off, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC
position. This will occur even if the message was cleared previously.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. "Full Off" mode is only intended for offhighway or off-road use.
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles/kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" also flashes when TCS is active. If the "ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
· The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" and the "ESC OFF Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
· Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
· The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off or full off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Partial Off" or "ESC Full Off" modes. Refer to the ESC
The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize portion of this section for an explanation of the different an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appro- ESC operating modes.
priate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.
WARNING!
TSC will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized.
If the TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle 5
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
trailer tongue weight recommendations. When TSC is
functioning, the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Light" will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is only active in the default "ESC On" mode. TSC can be disabled by pressing the "ESC Off" switch and entering "ESC Partial Off" mode. It is not active in the "ESC
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It is triggered by the windshield wiper setting and only functions when they are in use. When Rainy Brake Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
1 -- U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 -- Size Designation 3 -- Service Description
4 -- Maximum Load
5 -- Maximum Pressure 6 -- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
NOTE:
· Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
· P (Passenger) -- Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter "T" or "S" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
· European -- Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
· High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
· LT (Light Truck) -- Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or ....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
R means radial construction, or
D means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
5
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: · XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or · LL = Light load tire or · C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
5
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
5
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in this section.
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on your vehicle's placard.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- 5
XXX kg" on the Tire and Loading Information placard. sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
· If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
· For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Safety
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES -- GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
· Safety and Vehicle Stability
· Economy
· Tread Wear
WARNING!
· Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
· Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
· Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
· Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
· Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
· Ride Comfort
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
WARNING! (Continued)
Fuel Economy
· Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the resulting in higher fuel consumption.
right or left. · Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
5
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
· Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Tire Inflation Pressures
· Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
vehicle to drift left or right.
driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
At least once a month:
· Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
· Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always "cold tire inflation pressure." Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
WARNING!
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high 75 mph (120 km/h). speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
5
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:
· The tire has not been driven on when flat.
· The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
· The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.
All Season Tires -- If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires -- If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should 5 not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
Snow Tires
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires tire inflation pressures.
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
"mountain/snowflake" symbol on the tire sidewall.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
Run Flat Tires -- If Equipped
Spare Tires -- If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to "Tire Service Kit" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel -- If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
tire rotation pattern.
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Compact Spare Tire -- If Equipped
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
WARNING!
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
5
driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. only. With these spares, do not drive more than
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter "T" 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
or "S" preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
80D18 103M.
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip- spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
Full Size Spare -- If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare -- If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in "What To Do In
Emergencies" for further information.
5
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 -- Worn Tire 2 -- New Tire
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to "Replacement Tires" in this section for further information.
· Distance driven.
· Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
Life Of Tire
WARNING!
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:
· Driving style.
· Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
Replacement Tires
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
"Tread Wear Indicator." Refer to the Tire and Loading you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure 5
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
· Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
· Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage. · Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
· Use on Front Tires Only
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models with a
· Due to limited clearance, the following traction de- Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
vices are recommended:
· The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with 225/
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
65R17 and 225/60R18 tires.
· Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/55R18 tire Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models
sizes are not chainable.
· The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use
· The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with the use of 225/65R17 tires on size 17 x 7.5 ET31 wheels.
5
of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
CAUTION!
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models without a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
· Original equipment 225/65R17 and 225/60R18 tire sizes are not chainable.
· Use on Front Tires Only · Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models may
result if tire chains or traction devices are used with
original equipment size tires.
· The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
(Continued)
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued) · Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Models with-
out a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit may result if tire chains or traction devices are used with original equipment size tires. · Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models may result if tire chains or traction devices are used with original equipment size tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: · Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. · Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). · Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). · Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. · Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
CAUTION! (Continued)
· Observe the traction device manufacturer's instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer's if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
· Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or 5
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation method is the "rearward cross" shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation method is the "forward-cross" shown in the following diagram.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
CAUTION! (Continued) damage to the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
into the tire sidewall. Refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle's tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning 5
mended cold placard pressure.
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi- and natural pressure loss through the tire.
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" to turn off.
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn ON the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light." Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will still be on. In this situation, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
CAUTION!
· The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.
CAUTION! (Continued)
· After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
5
· The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
· The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
(Continued)
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
· Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
· The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light."
· Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components: · Receiver Module · Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors · Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a "LOW TIRE PRESSURE" message will display in the instrument cluster, an Inflate to XX message will be displayed and
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or Service TPMS Warning
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you When a system fault is detected, the "Tire Pressure
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the Inflate to XX message. Once the
also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off
will automatically update and the "Tire Pressure Moni- when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault 5
toring Telltale Light" will turn off.
can occur due to any of the following:
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
this information.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will sound and the "TPMS Telltale Light" and "LOW TIRE PRESSURE" and Inflate to XX messages will turn on upon the next ignition cycle.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the "TPMS Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound and the "TPMS Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update automatically and the "TPMS Telltale Light" will turn off, as long as no tire pressure is below the lowpressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System -- If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
· Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
· Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
5
The TPMS consists of the following components:
four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle
· Receiver Module · Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensos
Information Center (EVIC)/Driver information Display (DID) will display a Tire Low message for a minimum of five seconds, an Inflate to XX message and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the EVIC/DID will return to their original color, and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color in the EVIC/DID graphic) to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the Inflate to XX message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
SERVICE TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC/DID will
display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to 5 facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will sound and the "TPMS Telltale Light" will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a Tire Low message, an Inflate to XX message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value in a different color.
4. The EVIC/DID will display a graphic showing the tire pressure value in the same color as the other pressure values in place of the different color low tire pressure value. The EVIC/DID will also display a "SPARE LOW PRESSURE" message to remind you to service the flat tire.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) the "TPMS Telltale Light" will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the "TPMS Telltale Light" will remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
graphic in the EVIC/DID will still display a different will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC/DID will
color pressure value and an Inflate to XX message.
display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h), the "TPMS Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. General Information
5
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, the "TPMS Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC/DID will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the "TPMS Telltale Light"
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses:
United States Canada
GQ4-61T 1470A-42T
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L Engine
These engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded "regular" gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
3.2L Engine
These engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
89 octane premium gasoline for optimum performance. proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to system components.
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
high speeds can cause damage and should be reported to Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
your dealer immediately. Engine damage resulting from genates such as ethanol. operating with a heavy spark knock may not be covered
5
by the new vehicle warranty.
CAUTION!
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as "Reformulated Gasoline." Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light" to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10% ethanol.
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
· Operate in a lean mode.
· OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on.
· Poor engine performance.
· Poor cold start and cold drivability.
· Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E-85 perform the following:
· Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
· Change the engine oil and oil filter.
· Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
life and reduces emissions system performance in some Fuel System Cautions
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
CAUTION!
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle's
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
performance: · The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
Materials Added To Fuel
formance and damage the emissions control sys- 5
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
tem. · An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
568 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued) · The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: · Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 569
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
· Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on E-85.
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
with all side windows fully open.
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE ONLY) -- IF
unleaded gasoline.
5
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.
570 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Requirements
NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
· Add 5 gallons (19 Liters) or more when refueling.
· Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
· Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and rough idle following start up may be experienced even if the above recommendations are followed, especially when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
· Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
STARTING AND OPERATING 571
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. It is recommended that Cruising Range
engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines.
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/Kilometers per liter and the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Starting The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
Replacement Parts All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
5
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time Ethanol compatible service components are required.
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
CAUTION!
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel. Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may compatible components can damage your vehicle.
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
572 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability.
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located on the driver's side door trim).
ADDING FUEL
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use with this vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door reinforcement.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 573
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler cap.
NOTE:
· In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
· When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank 5 is full.
· Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
· If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
574 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
· Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
· A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to turn on.
· To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top off" the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
· Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled.
· Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
· A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove access door located on right interior trim panel for release cable with the tip of your key.
STARTING AND OPERATING 575
5 Fuel Door Release Location
576 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Grab the release cable tether and pull up to release the fuel filler door.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to "Onboard Diagnostic System" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
Fuel Door Released Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "CHECK GASCAP" message will be displayed in the
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
STARTING AND OPERATING 577
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
bottom of the label is your VIN.
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
5
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
cle's GVWR.
Payload
Tire Size
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
578 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rim Size
Loading
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING 579
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way follow the requirements and recommendations in this
the brakes operate.
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
CAUTION!
Common Towing Definitions
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
5
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
your vehicle.
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
TRAILER TOWING
Certification Label" in "Starting And Operating" for
In this section you will find safety tips and information further information.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
580 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or more, it is mandatory to use a weightdistributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
STARTING AND OPERATING 581
Trailer Sway Control -- Mechanical
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight is 10% to 15% of the vehicle's GTW for a conventional hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Frontal Area
Weight-Carrying Hitch
5
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
582 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
· An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
· Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 583
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
5
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the "Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)" chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
584 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/ Transmission
2.4L/Automatic with or without Trailer Tow Package
3.2L/Automatic
3.2L/Automatic with Trailer Tow
Package
Model FWD or 4WD
Frontal Area 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
Maximum GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Maximum Tongue Wt. (See Note)
200 lbs (91 kg)
FWD or 4WD FWD or 4WD
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
39.44 sq ft (3.66 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg) 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
200 lbs (91 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 585
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to "Tire Safety Information" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
5
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side Consider the following items when computing the
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
· The tongue weight of the trailer. · The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle. · The weight of the driver and all passengers.
586 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the "Tire and Loading Information" placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible:
WARNING! (Continued)
· Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.
· When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
· Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 587
WARNING! (Continued) · Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always, block or chock the trailer wheels. · GCWR must not be exceeded. · Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
CAUTION!
· Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
· Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps 5 the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements -- Tires
· Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
· Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for proper tire inflation procedures.
588 STARTING AND OPERATING
· Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
· Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for the proper inspection procedure.
· When replacing tires, refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements -- Trailer Brakes
· Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
· An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
· Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
· Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
STARTING AND OPERATING 589
Towing Requirements -- Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
5
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
590 STARTING AND OPERATING
1 -- Female Pins 2 -- Male Pin 3 -- Ground
Four-Pin Connector
4 -- Park 5 -- Left Stop/Turn 6 -- Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 -- Battery 2 -- Backup Lamps 3 -- Right Stop/Turn 4 -- Electric Brakes
5 -- Ground 6 -- Left Stop/Turn 7 -- Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 591
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission -- If Equipped
· When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
· Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The Cooling System
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- 5 frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shift- heating, take the following actions:
ing does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear range.
City Driving
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
performance and extend transmission life by reducing Highway Driving
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking.
Reduce speed.
Electronic Speed Control -- If Equipped
Air Conditioning
· Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Turn off temporarily.
592 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Flat Tow
Dolly Tow On Trailer
Wheels OFF the Ground NONE
Front Rear ALL
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK NOT ALLOWED
OK
4X4 Models
1-Speed Power Transfer Unit
2-Speed Power Transfer Unit
NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions: · Transmission in
PARK · Power transfer
unit in
NEUTRAL (N) · Tow in forward
direction
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
STARTING AND OPERATING 593
Recreational Towing -- Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) 5. Release the parking brake.
Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
CAUTION!
will result.
Towing with the front wheels on the ground will
Recreational towing (for front-wheel drive models) is cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. improper towing is not covered under the New
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle Vehicle Limited Warranty. trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
5
Recreational Towing -- 4X4 Models With 1-Speed
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following Power Transfer Unit
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in unit.
PARK.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
594 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the ground can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing -- 4X4 Models With 2-Speed Power Transfer Unit
The power transfer unit must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the power transfer unit selector switch. Shifts into and out of NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
· DO NOT dolly tow any 4x4 vehicle. Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
· Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the power transfer unit.
· The transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing.
· Before recreational towing, perform the procedure outlined under "Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)" to be certain that the power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 595
CAUTION! (Continued)
· Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
· Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
WARNING! (Continued)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for 5 recreational towing.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
CAUTION!
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N)
(Continued)
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the transmission to PARK.
596 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold the recessed NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
Neutral Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 597
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) NOTE:
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
· Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
8. Start the engine.
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before press-
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
that there is no vehicle movement.
during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
11. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
will flash continuously until all requirements are met 5 or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
12. Apply the parking brake.
· The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
13. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
OFF, and remove the key fob.
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
· A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
598 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for one second.
Neutral Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
STARTING AND OPERATING 599
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the NOTE:
power transfer unit will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.
· Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
NOTE: When shifting the power transfer unit out of continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
NEUTRAL (N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid If any of these requirements are not met before press-
gear clash.
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or 5
10. Release the brake pedal.
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle. 12. Start the engine. 13. Press and hold the brake pedal. 14. Release the parking brake. 15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
· The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
· A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .603 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .616
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .617
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620 6
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
TIRE SERVICE KIT -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .606 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .628
Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606 Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .607 Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .608 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .610 RECOVERY STRAP -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .634
602 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .636
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . .638
4x4 Models With 1Speed Power Transfer Unit -- With Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
4x4 Models With 2Speed Power Transfer Unit -- With Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 603
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank below the radio screen.
potential for overheating your engine by taking the
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning appropriate action. flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- · On the highways -- slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming · In city traffic -- while stopped, put transmission in traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
CAUTION!
6
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H," pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H" and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
may wear down your battery.
604 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:
· If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
· You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque 100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)
**Lug Nut/ Bolt Size
M12 x 1.25
Lug Nut/ Bolt
Socket Size
19 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 605
6
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
Tire Service Kit Storage The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor behind the rear seat. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
TIRE SERVICE KIT -- IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼" (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Load Floor Handle
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
1 -- Sealant Bottle 2 -- Deflation Button 3 -- Pressure Gauge 4 -- Power Button
5 -- Mode Select Knob 6 -- Sealant Hose (Clear) 7 -- Air Pump Hose (Black) 8 -- Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 607
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
6 Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting this mode.
608 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
· Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to "Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit" section (F) "Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement".
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location · The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer.
· When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
· For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
· You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼" (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
· Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 609
WARNING!
· Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
· Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4" (6 mm) or larger.
6
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
610 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued) · Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source. · A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. · Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle's Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 611
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as valve stem.
necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire.
4. Set the parking brake.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
6
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
· Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Service Kit.
Sealant Mode position.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
· After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
deflated tire.
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
612 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 613
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
pressure within 15 minutes:
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
· The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) "Drive Vehicle."
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
CAUTION!
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
· The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. · Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
6
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel.
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle's interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit.
614 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(D) Drive Vehicle:
(E) After Driving:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to "Whenever You Stop to Use Tire Service Kit" before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air Mode position.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 615
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit panel after the tire has been repaired.
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
and loading information label on the driver-side door assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
opening.
sible. Refer to (F) "Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla- ment".
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, using the Tire Service Kit.
6
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
12 Volt outlet.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle.
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly.
616 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
· Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
· Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
· Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 617
WARNING! (Continued)
· The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under
6
the load floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate. 2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the hook from the stowed position on the back side of the load floor and place the hook over the top body in white flange and weather seal. This will hold the load floor up while obtaining the jack and spare tire.
618 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.
Jack And Spare Tire Fastener 5. Remove the chocks.
6. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack assembly.
Jack And Tool Assembly NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with two attachment points. When the jack is partially expanded, the tension between the two attachment points holds the jack handle in place.
7. Remove the spare tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 619
WARNING!
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake. A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- 4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire 5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position. repaired or replaced immediately.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
Preparations For Jacking
opposite of the jacking position. For
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
example, if changing the right front 6 tire, chock the left rear wheel.
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
620 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: · Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. · Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. · Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. · Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK. · Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack. · Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift. · Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change. · If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic. · To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 621
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
6
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in
the sill cladding.
622 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jacking Locations
Rear Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Engagement Point
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 623
6 Front Jacking Location
624 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
Front Jacking Engagement Point 5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire. 7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly and
thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in mounting the spare tire. 8. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 625
NOTE: · For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
· Refer to "Compact Spare Tire" and to "Limited-Use Spare" under "Tires--General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for additional warnings, cautions, and information about the spare tire, its use, and operation.
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the 6 wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury.
626 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to "Torque Specifications" in this section for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
Assembled Jack 12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 627
WARNING! (Continued)
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
6
Stowed Tire, Jack And Chock
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury.
(Continued)
628 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to "Torque Specifications" in this section for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using the means provided. Release the parking brake before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 629
6 Positive Battery Post
630 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
· Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
· Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
· Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and turn the ignition to LOCK.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 631
CAUTION!
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
the discharged vehicle's engine) away from the battery
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
and the fuel injection system.
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and 6
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper could result in serious injury. Only use the specific
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts. 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
632 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the shift lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE, while gently pushing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must push the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 633
CAUTION!
· Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rockingmotion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
· When "rocking" a stuck vehicle by shifting be- 6 tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
· Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
634 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Push the "ESC Off" switch (if necessary), to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC Off switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
RECOVERY STRAP -- IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be included with a recovery strap. Recovery straps do not act like traditional tow straps, chains, or winch cables.
WARNING!
Recovery straps should only be used in emergencies to rescue stranded vehicles. Only use Recovery straps on vehicles that fit within the recommended GVW of your recovery strap. Only attach recovery straps to OE recommended anchor points or emergency towing anchor points. Never attach to tow ball or vehicle tie down point, these are not designed for this purpose. Never attach to vehicle steering, drive train, or any other suspension components. NEVER pull a strap over sharp edges or abrasive surfaces that can damage the recovery strap. NEVER use a damaged
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) strap, it has reduced strength. DO NOT attempt to repair straps. ONLY persons involved in the recovery should be in either vehicle. No passengers. Anyone inside the vehicles can be struck by strap recoil, causing serious injury. MOVE bystanders at least 40 feet from the recovery area when using the recovery strap.
Using Recovery Strap
1. Review all warnings and instructions first.
2. Position the recovery vehicle.
3. Connect the recovery strap.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 635
4. Add a recovery damper or blanket. 5. Clear the danger zone. 6. Safely and slowly start pulling. 7. Disconnect the recovery strap after both vehicle are
secure and parked.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be 6 moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever: 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Apply the parking brake.
636 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate the shifter bezel and boot assembly from the center console bezel.
4. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into the shift lever override access hole (at the right front corner of the shift lever assembly), and push and hold the override release lever down.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described under "Recreational Towing" in the "Starting And Operating" section.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever boot.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF FWD MOD-
the Ground
ELS
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Rear
Front ALL
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 637
4X4 MODELS
1SPEED POWER TRANSFER
UNIT
2SPEED POWER TRANSFER
UNIT
NOT ALLOWED
See instructions under
"Recreational Towing" in
"Starting And Operating" · Transmission in PARK · Power Transfer Unit in 6
NEUTRAL · Tow in forward direc-
tion
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED OK
NOT ALLOWED BEST METHOD
638 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE: Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical failure when the electric parking brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to "Shift Lever Override" in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle can be moved.
CAUTION!
· Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
· When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 639
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front a towing dolly.
wheels raised).
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
· DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam- · Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit 6 will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
4x4 Models With 1Speed Power Transfer Unit -- With Key Fob
towing. · Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels OFF the ground.
power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
640 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4x4 Models With 2Speed Power Transfer Unit -- With Key Fob
· If equipped with a Manual transmission, it must be in gear ( Not in Neutral).
The manufacturer recommends towing with all four Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting and Operat-
wheels OFF the ground.
ing" for detailed instructions.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the Power Transfer Unit is operable, vehicles with a 2speed Power Transfer Unit may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), under the following conditions:
· The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEUTRAL (N).
· If equipped with an Automatic transmission, it must be in PARK.
CAUTION!
· Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal damage to the transmission or power transfer unit will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
· Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .643 ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 3.2L . . . . . . . . . .644 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -- OBD II . .645
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .645 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .648
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . .656 Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 7 Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
Front Turn Signals And Front Side Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .710
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .710
Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk) . . . . . . . . . . . . .711
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690 Bodyside Mounted Back-up Lamp . . . . . . . . .711
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp . . . . . . . . . .712
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .712
VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713
REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .714
BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .708 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .714
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps . . . . .708 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 2.4L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
1 -- Air Cleaner Filter 2 -- Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 3 -- Oil Fill Cap 4 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir
7
5 -- Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 -- Battery 7 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir 8 -- Engine Oil Dipstick
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 3.2L
1 -- Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 -- Engine Oil Filter Access Cover 3 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 -- Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 -- Engine Oil Dipstick 7 -- Engine Oil Fill 8 -- Air Cleaner Filter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -- OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
· Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emission control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
tests can be performed. · If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will turn on the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)." It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
7
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "CHECK GASCAP" message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to "Onboard Diagnostic System" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
happen:
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
· The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
not proceed to the I/M station.
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
· The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully running.
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off REPLACEMENT PARTS
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled 7
to the I/M station.
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, Limited Warranty.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed "Maintenance Schedule", there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
· Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
· Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE or crosshatch zone 7 on the dipstick. Adding 1 quart (0.9 L) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines.
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever occurs first.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
CAUTION!
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) -- 3.2L Engine
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) -- 2.4L Engine
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
MOPAR® SAE 0W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil® location, refer to "Engine Compartment" in "Maintaining
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem- Your Vehicle" for further information.
peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
7
grade for your engine.
ber should not be used.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- Synthetic Engine Oils
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
ber should not be used.
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the "dusty or off-road conditions" maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should 7 change your air cleaner filter.
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal 1. Remove the screws from the air cleaner cover.
2. Push in on the quick connect clip with your thumb and remove by pulling hose (If Equipped) away from air cleaner filter cover.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 -- Clean Air Hose Clamp 2 -- Air Hose (If Equipped) 3 -- Screws
Air Cleaner Air Hose -- If Equipped
1 -- Air Filter Cleaner Cover 2 -- Air Hose (If Equipped) 3 -- Quick Connect Clip
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
3. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner 4. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
filter.
assembly.
7
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 -- Air Cleaner Cover 2 -- Air Cleaner Filter
Air Cleaner Filter
1 -- Air Cleaner Filter 2 -- Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Install screws to secure the air cleaner cover to the housing assembly and install air hose (If Equipped).
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
· Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running.
WARNING! (Continued) · When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition switch position. You could be injured by the moving fan blades. · You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
(Continued)
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
· Rib or belt wear
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
· Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
· Belt slips
· "Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)
· Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before new belt is installed)
· Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
7
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) Conditions that would require replacement:
· Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt body)
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
· Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to "Jump-Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
WARNING! (Continued)
· Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
· Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
CAUTION!
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
· It is essential when replacing the cables on the time.
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
WARNING!
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. · If a "fast charger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a "fast charger" to provide starting voltage.
· Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to 7 Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
· The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a -- If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf -- If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in front of the evaporator on the lower right of center console. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover.
7
Console Closeout Panel
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down the passenger hush panel under the dash panel
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the top of the door to release the cover then rotate the door out and lift up.
Hush Panel
Air Filter Cover Location
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing. Take note of the air filter position indicators.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash panel and console closeout.
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
Body Lubrication
A/C Air Filter
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:
· Wear Or Uneven Edges
· Foreign Material
· Hardening Or Cracking
· Deformation Or Fatigue
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged.
7
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 -- Wiper 2 -- Release Tab 3 -- Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 -- Wiper Blade 2 -- Release Tab 3 -- Wiper Arm
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade from the wiper arm).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
7 Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 -- Wiper Blade 2 -- Wiper Arm 3 -- Release Tab
668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
7 Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 -- Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 -- Wiper Arm
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
1 -- Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 -- Wiper Arm 3 -- Wiper Blade
670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 -- Wiper Blade 2 -- Wiper Blade Pivot Pin 3 -- Wiper Arm 4 -- Wiper Arm Receptacle
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671
Installing The Rear Wiper
Adding Washer Fluid
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass The windshield and rear window washers share the same
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front
glass.
of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
vehicle.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance. 7
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
· Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
· A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
· The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
· Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop 7 the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.
674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage: · Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. · Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle. · Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
WARNING! (Continued)
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, Cooling System -- Drain, Flush And Refill
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but needed to be added to the system please contact your
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for local authorized dealer.
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti- flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery MS.90032).
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
7
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper
maintenance intervals.
676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
CAUTION!
· Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any "globally compatible" coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. · Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. · This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677
· Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
· We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant NOTE:
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032.
· Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
7
· Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant needed to be added to the system please contact your
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- local authorized dealer.
dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34° F (-37° C) are anticipated.
· Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
· Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
WARNING! (Continued)
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. · Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 679
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
spills immediately.
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032
Coolant Level
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for Points To Remember
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
indicated on the bottle.
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
7
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
680 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
· Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
· Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
· If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
· Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
· Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
· Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
· Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 681
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
should be checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
WARNING!
Brake Master Cylinder
· Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the
fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further
7
"Brake Warning Light" is illuminated.
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
682 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. · Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 683
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
used.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
turer's recommended fluid may cause deterioration nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter Vehicle Limited Warranty.
shudder. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts" in this section for fluid specifications.
Fluid Level Check
Special Additives
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not 7 require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and check your transmission fluid level using special service
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use
684 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 685
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are: · Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. · Stone and gravel impact. · Insects, tree sap and tar.
· If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
· Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
· Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
· Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
· Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
CAUTION!
7
Washing · Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
· Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild · Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
clear water.
and decals.
686 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Care
· If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
· It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
· If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
· If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
· If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.
· If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
· Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
· All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
· To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 687
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure -- If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
· Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.
· Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel's protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
· For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. 7
· For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
· Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
688 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use protectants or other products, which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent, and if necessary, follow with MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 689
Cleaning Headlights
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break- equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
age than glass headlights.
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
lowed by rinsing.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care 7
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
690 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
· When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. · If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. · If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 691
7 Power Distribution Center
692 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F06 F07
Blade Fuse
15 Amp Blue
F08
25 Amp Clear
F09
F10
20 Amp Yellow
F11
F12
20 Amp Yellow
F13
10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
Description
Not Used Powertrain Control Module PCM (Diesel Only) Engine Control Module (ECM)/Fuel Injection Not Used Power Transfer Unit (PTU) If Equipped Not Used Brake Vacuum Pump - If Equipped Engine Control Module (ECM)
Cavity F14
Blade Fuse 10 Amp Red
F15
F16
20 Amp Yellow
F17
F18
F19
F20
10 Amp Red
F21
F22
5 Amp Tan
F23
70 Amp Tan
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 693
Description Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) / Power Take-Off Unit (PTU) / Brake System Module (BSM) If Equipped/ Brake Pedal Switch/Back Up Switch (Diesel Only) Not Used Powertrain Not Used
7 Not Used Starter Solenoid A/C Compressor Clutch Not Used Radiator Fan Body Controller Module (BCM) - Feed 2
694 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F23
Blade Fuse 50 Amp Red
F24
F25B
F26 F27 F28 F29
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
Description
Voltage Stability Module (VSM) Feed #2 - If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Rear Wiper -- If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Front Washer -- If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Fuel Heater - Diesel Only
Not Used
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Not Used
Cavity F30
F31 F32 F33 F34 F35 F36 F37 F38 F38
F39 F40
Blade Fuse 10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green 20 Amp Blue
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 695
Description
Engine Control Module (ECM)/(EPS)/(PCM)
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
7
Not Used
Glow Plugs (Diesel Only) - If Equipped
HVAC Blower Motor
Trailer Tow Park Light - If Equipped
696 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F40
Blade Fuse
F41
60 Amp Yellow
F41
50 Amp Red
F42
F43
20 Amp Yellow
F44
F45
F46
Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 25 Amp Clear
Description
Headlamp Washer Pump - If Equipped
Body Controller Module (BCM) - Feed 1
Voltage Stability Module Feed 1 - If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Trailer Tow Electric Brake Module - If Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
Trailer Tow / 7-Way Connector - If Equipped
Passenger Door Module (PDM) - If Equipped
Sunroof If Equipped
Cavity F48
F49
F50 F51 F52
F53
F54
Blade Fuse
Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 697
Description
Driver Door Module - If Equipped
Power Inverter (115V A/C) If Equipped
Power Liftgate - If Equipped
Not Used
Front Wipers - If Equipped
with Stop/Start Engine Op-
tion
7
Brake System Module &
Valves
Body Control Module (BCM) Feed 3
698 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F55
Blade Fuse 10 Amp Red
F56
15 Amp Blue
F57
20 Amp Yellow
F58
10 Amp Red
F59
F60
20 Amp Yellow
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
Description
Blind Spot Sensors / Compass / Rearview Camera / Trunk Lamp With Flashlamp Charger - If Equipped
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)/KIN/RF Hub/ Electric Steering Column Lock (ESL)
Trailer Tow Lights Left - If Equipped
Occupant Classification Module/VSM/ESC
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) If Equipped
Power Outlet - Center Console
Cavity F61 F62 F63 F64 F65
Blade Fuse 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F66
15 Amp Blue
Cartridge Fuse
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 699
Description
Trailer Tow Lights Right If Equipped
Windshield de-icer - If Equipped
Front Heated/Vented Seats If Equipped
Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped
In Car Temperature Sensor / 7 Humidity Sensor / Driver Assist System Module (DASM) / Park Assist (PAM) - If Equipped with Stop/Start option
HVAC (ECC) / Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
700 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F67
Blade Fuse 10 Amp Red
F68
F69
10 Amp Red
69A
10 Amp Red
F70
5 Amp Tan
Cartridge Fuse
Description
In Car Temperature Sensor / Humidity Sensor / Driver Assist System Module (DASM) / Park Assist (PAM) - If Not Equipped with Stop/ Start Option
Not Used
Power Transfer Unit Switch (TSBM) / Active Grill Shutter (AGS) - If Equipped with Gas Engine
Power Transfer Unit Switch (TSBM) - If Equipped with Diesel Engine
Intelligent Battery Sensor If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Cavity F71
F72 F73
F74 F75 F76
F77
F78
Blade Fuse 20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 701
Description
HID Headlamp Right if Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Heated Mirrors - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Back Up - If Equipped
Rear Defroster
Cigar Lighter - If Equipped
Rear Differential Module
7
(RDM) - If Equipped
Fuel Door Release/Brake Pedal Switch
Diagnostic Port
702 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F79
Blade Fuse 10 Amp Red
F80
20 Amp Yellow
F81
F82
F83
F84
F85
F86
20 Amp Yellow
Cartridge Fuse
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
Description
Integrated Center Stack (ICS) / HVAC / Aux Switch Bank Module (ASBM) / Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
Radio / CD - If Equipped
Not Used
Not Used
Engine Controller Module (Gas)
Electric Park Brake (EPB) Left
Not Used
Horns - If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
Cavity F87A
F88
F89 F90 F91
F92 F93
Blade Fuse 20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 703
Description
HID Headlamp Left - If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Collision Mitigation Module (CMM) / Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart Camera Module - If Equipped
Headlamp Leveling - If
Equipped
Not Used
7
Power Outlet Rear - If Equipped - Customer Selectable
Not Used
Brake System Module (BSM) Pump Motor
704 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F94
Blade Fuse
F95
10 Amp Red
F96 F97 F98 F99 F100
10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 25 Amp Clear
Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink
Description
Electric Park Brake (EPB) Right
Electrochromatic Mirror / Rain Sensor / Sunroof - If Equipped / Passenger Window Switch / Power Outlet Console
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) / (Airbag)
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) / (Airbag)
Audio Amplifier - If Equipped
Not Used
Not Used
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 705
Cavity F13 F32 F36 F38 F43 F48 F49 F50 F51 F53
Blade Fuse 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 25 Amp Clear 7.5 Amp Brown 7.5 Amp Brown 10 Amp Red 7.5 Amp Brown
Description
Low Beam Left
Interior Lighting
Intrusion Module/Siren If Equipped
Deadbolt All Unlock
7
Washer Pump Front
Fog Lamp Rear Left/Right If Equipped
Lumbar Support
Wireless Charging Pad If Equipped
Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors If Equipped
UCI Port (USB & AUX)
706 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Blade Fuse
Description
F89
10 Amp Red
Door Locks Driver Unlock
F91
7.5 Amp Brown
Fog Lamp Front Left
F92
7.5 Amp Brown
Fog Lamp Front Right
F93
10 Amp Red
Low Beam Right
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery. You may: · Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
· Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Cargo Lamp Overhead Console Lamp
Reading Lamp Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps
Front Park/Daytime Running Lamps Front Turn Signal Lamps Front Fog Lamps Front Side Marker Lamps
Front Fog Lamps (Trailhawk)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 707
Bulb Number TL2122
PLW2142A WL2122
Bulb Number
HIR2LL
7
D3S (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
WY21W or 7440NA
H11LL
194
PSX24W
708 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Tail/Turn/Stop Lamps Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Back-Up Lamps License Plate Lamp
Bulb Number LED ( Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
W16W or 921 W5W
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps -- If Equipped
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 709
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
1. Remove the 3 hex head screws from the wheel liner. 6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
2. Pull the exterior edge of the liner towards the tire to gain access to the headlamp bulb cap.
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in 7 place.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to unlock it.
7. Install the bulb cap in the headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
4. Firmly grasp the bulb and connector assembly and 8. Install the 3 hex head screws into the wheel liner.
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
710 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Turn Signals And Front Side Marker Lamps Front Fog Lamp
1. Open the hood.
1. Remove the 3 hex head screws from the wheel liner.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the upper lamp assembly on the passenger side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise, and then remove the bulb and socket assembly from the lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing, and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Re-install air cleaner filter housing if removed.
2. Pull the exterior edge of the liner towards the tire to gain access to the bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb's socket counterclockwise, and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 711
5. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the into the 5. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector clockwise reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog
to lock it in place.
lamp housing until it locks in place.
6. Install the 3 hex head screws into the wheel liner.
6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.
Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk)
Bodyside Mounted Back-up Lamp
1. Unlock lower access door in wheel liner.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb. 2. Remove the screws that fasten the tail lamp housing to
3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and the vehicle.
pull straight out from the fog lamp. 4. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to 7 disengage the lamp from the vehicle.
CAUTION!
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from housing.
6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
7. Replace the bulb and install the socket.
712 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
9. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and screws.
8. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket.
10. Close the liftgate.
9. Connect the electrical connector.
Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp
10. Reinstall the trim panel and the lower trim.
1. Open the liftgate.
11. Close the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Once the trim is loose, pull it back exposing the trim panel.
License Plate Lamp
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on the lamp assembly for removal.
4. Using a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver, open the 2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp
trim panel exposing the back of the liftgate lamp.
assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp.
FLUID CAPACITIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 713
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.2L Engines
15.8 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
5.5 Quarts
3.2 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
7.2 Quarts
3.2 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
10 Quarts
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
60 Liters
5.2 Liters 5.6 Liters
6.8 Liters
7
9.5 Liters
714 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Engine Coolant
Engine Oil 2.4L Engine
Engine Oil 3.2L Engine
Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 2.4L/3.2L Engines
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
87 Octane
CAUTION!
· Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any "globally compatible" coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 715
CAUTION! (Continued) · Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. · This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
7
716 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis Component Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATFTM Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .718
Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720
8
718 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the "Oil Change Required" message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever comes first.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
· Check engine oil level.
· Check windshield washer fluid level.
· Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
· Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
· Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 719
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
· Change oil and filter
· Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
· Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
· Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
· Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
8
· Inspect exhaust system
· Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
720 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000
32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years:
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
X
X
X
X
X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace spark plugs **
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 721
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years:
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000
Or Kilometers:
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
8
722 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
· You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
· Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727
Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .725 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .728
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .725 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .729
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .729
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .726 Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .726
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .729 9
In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .729
In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .730
724 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731
Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731 Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .732
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 725
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests
YOUR VEHICLE
If you list a number of items and you must have your
Prepare For The Appointment
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. 9
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the
726 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. · If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
· If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information: · Owner's name and address
· Owner's telephone number (home and office)
· Authorized dealer name · Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) · Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P.O. Box 218004 Auburn Hills, MI 483218004 Phone: (877) 426-5337 Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 727
In Mexico Contact Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you 9
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter have any questions about the service contract, call the
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
728 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 729
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could You can also obtain other information about motor cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
9
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
730 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 731
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
· 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) · 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: · www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by Traction Grades
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on
9
your vehicle.
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
requirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
732 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
734 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .185 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .676 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Air Bag
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Front Passenger Knee Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Lighter Weight Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Occupant Classification Module (OCM) . . . . . . . .69 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Air bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .652 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
INDEX 735
Alarm
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .294
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 10
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .408 Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
736 INDEX
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713
Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .646 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Checks, Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
INDEX 737
Child Restraints
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . .106 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . .105 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .678
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .97 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .93 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Cleaning
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679 10
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
738 INDEX
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636 Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Door Locks Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Driver Information Display (DID) Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Driver's Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .294
INDEX 739
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .714
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .181 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .278 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Change Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .330 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Emergency, In Case of
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .646
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 10
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
740 INDEX
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688 Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Flashers Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Fluid Level Checks Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .714 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .710
INDEX 741
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690 Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Gauges Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .714 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 10 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
742 INDEX
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .169 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .708 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .169 Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
INDEX 743
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705 Keyless Enter-N-GoTM
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Lock The Vehicle's Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Intervention Regeneration Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 10
Key Fob
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
744 INDEX
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711 Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .712 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .321 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .172 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
INDEX 745
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .321 Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .710 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .321 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730 Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .710 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 10 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
746 INDEX
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 MOPAR® Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
INDEX 747
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Pretensioners
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .678
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .532 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Power
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .294 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 10
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
748 INDEX
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592 Shifting into Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) . . .595 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .595 Shifting out of Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) . .598 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .598
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .404
Remote Starting Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . . .33 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .729 Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
INDEX 749
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .729 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .59
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Seat Belt
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .59 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .62 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 10
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
750 INDEX
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .714 SENTRY KEY® FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730 Shifting Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Power Transfer Unit, Shifting into Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .714 Specifications Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .714 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .714 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
INDEX 751
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Steering
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .419
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .404 Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .531
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 10
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .65 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
752 INDEX
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .592 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
INDEX 753
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Transfer Case
Uconnect® Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .375
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716 Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26 Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .280 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .23 Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 10
Uconnect®
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19
754 INDEX
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Wireless Charging Pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle's electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle's electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
15KL74-126-AD
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Adobe PDF Library 11.0